WO2018032492A1 - Downlink transmission method and network device - Google Patents

Downlink transmission method and network device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018032492A1
WO2018032492A1 PCT/CN2016/095970 CN2016095970W WO2018032492A1 WO 2018032492 A1 WO2018032492 A1 WO 2018032492A1 CN 2016095970 W CN2016095970 W CN 2016095970W WO 2018032492 A1 WO2018032492 A1 WO 2018032492A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
pilot
matrix
weight matrix
network device
target
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2016/095970
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
杨非
陈凯
王智鹰
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2016/095970 priority Critical patent/WO2018032492A1/en
Priority to CN201680086187.9A priority patent/CN109196789A/en
Publication of WO2018032492A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018032492A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L25/00Baseband systems
    • H04L25/02Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines
    • H04L25/03Shaping networks in transmitter or receiver, e.g. adaptive shaping networks

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of communications, and in particular, to a downlink transmission method and a network device.
  • a multi-input multi-output (MIMO) system since the channel reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels in the time division duplex (TDD) system is established, the network device passes the user.
  • the uplink reference signal sent by the user equipment (UE) is detected to obtain accurate instantaneous downlink channel state information (CSI), so that accurate beamforming transmission can be performed.
  • CSI downlink channel state information
  • the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels in the frequency division duplex (FDD) system is generally not established.
  • the network device cannot directly use the uplink channel estimation result to transmit the downlink beamforming, but adopts a fixed codebook for the channel.
  • the UE selects an optimal precoding codeword based on a certain criterion in the codebook according to the downlink channel estimation result, and feeds back an index to the network device, that is, a precoding matrix indicator (PMI)
  • PMI precoding matrix indicator
  • the network device uses the precoding codeword corresponding to the PMI to perform weighted transmission on the downlink data signal.
  • the network device and the UE in the FDD system store the same set of precoding codebooks, wherein the precoding codebook includes a plurality of precoding matrices.
  • the network device sends a pilot signal, for example, a cell-specific reference signal (CRS), to the UE, and the UE estimates the downlink channel by detecting the CRS, according to its internal setting.
  • the criterion selects the optimal quantization result of the current downlink channel estimation result in the pre-coded codebook, and sends it as the PMI to the network device.
  • the network device detects the PMI sent by the UE, and sets the precoding matrix corresponding to the PMI as the downlink single.
  • User (single-user, SU) precoding matrix is the communication process, as shown in FIG. 1, the network device sends a pilot signal, for example, a cell-specific reference signal (CRS), to the UE, and the UE estimates the downlink channel by detecting the CRS, according to its internal setting.
  • the UE can select a PMI codeword that matches the actual downlink channel from the 16 PMI codewords, and then the network device determines the precoding matrix according to the PMI codeword selected by the UE, but for multiple users (multiple- User, MU), the 16 PMI codewords and each UE pair
  • the quantization error of the actual downlink channel is large, and the PMI codeword selected by each UE from the 16 PMI codewords does not match the actual downlink channel corresponding to each UE, and the network device determines according to the PMI codeword selected by each UE.
  • the precoding matrix and weighted transmission of the downlink data signal can cause serious user interference.
  • the embodiment of the invention provides a downlink transmission method and a network device, which are used to solve the problem that the TM4 of the existing multiple input multiple output system is not suitable for downlink transmission to the MU.
  • the first aspect of the present invention provides a downlink transmission method, which is applied to a multiple input multiple output system.
  • the TM4 of the multiple input multiple output system is not only suitable for downlink transmission to the SU, but also applicable to the MU.
  • the method includes: the network device receives N PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are downlink channel estimates by the N UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device, and according to Determining, by the result of the downlink channel estimation, the first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix, and the network device is configured according to the N PMIs and the first pilot Determining, by the weighting matrix, N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors, the network device determining M scheduled UEs from the N UEs, and reconstructing channel main eigenvectors according to each of the M scheduled UEs Determining a second pilot weighting matrix, where M is an integer not greater than N, and the network device sends a second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs, where the second weighted pilot signal is determined by the network device According to the second pilot of the second pilot signal weight matrix obtained by frequency weighting
  • the network device receives N PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are determined by the N UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device, and the The first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix.
  • N is an integer greater than 1
  • the first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix.
  • the selection range of the PMI since the N PMIs are not the quantization of the real downlink channel, but the quantization of the downlink channel weighted by the first pilot weight matrix by the first pilot weight matrix, therefore, the network device needs to perform corresponding
  • the inverse transform can correctly restore the real downlink channel, and the network device determines N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix, and then Determining M scheduled UEs among the N UEs, and then determining a second pilot weighting matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, so that the second weighting matrix can be adopted Weighting the second pilot signal to obtain a second weighted pilot signal, and transmitting the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs, thereby reducing quantization error of the downlink channel, better suppressing interference between users, and improving The accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the first pilot weighting matrix is a target pilot weighting matrix determined by a previous pilot weighting, used to weight the pilot signal of this time, since the pilot is not used in the prior art.
  • Signal weighting so the first pilot weighting matrix weighting the pilot signal for the first time is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, and the target pilot weight matrix determined by weighting the second pilot signal
  • the third pilot weighting matrix is used as the third pilot weighting matrix, and the third pilot signal is weighted according to the first pilot weighting matrix, and so on, which is not specifically limited herein.
  • the network device determines, according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix, N reconstructed channel main feature vectors in a plurality of manners.
  • One possible manner includes: the network device first according to the manner The N PMIs determine N precoding codewords corresponding to the N PMIs, and then the network device determines a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords and a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix And second, the network device, according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the conjugate transpose corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix The matrix determines the N reconstructed channel main feature vectors.
  • the network device determines the N reconstructed channel masters.
  • the feature vector is used to correctly restore the true downlink channel.
  • the network device according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the first pilot weight matrix
  • the conjugate transposed matrix determines the N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors
  • the network device according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, and the conjugate transpose corresponding to the N precoding codewords
  • the matrix and the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weighting matrix determine the N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors by using a first formula, wherein the first formula is expressed as:
  • PrimEigVec represents the main feature vector of the matrix
  • L represents the total number of measurement subframes within the preset length
  • m is the measurement subframe number.
  • Representing a first pilot weighting matrix in which the measurement subframe is s m Determining a PMI selected by the user equipment u after channel estimation of the first pilot signal of the measurement subframe s m , Indicates that the PMI is Corresponding precoding codeword, Express Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix, Express Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix.
  • the network device constrains the first pilot weight matrix to be a unitary matrix, and then the network device maintains a local
  • the queue is configured to store the first pilot weight matrix, and maintain another queue for storing the PMI fed back by each UE, and determine N reconstructed channel main feature vectors by using the first formula.
  • determining the candidate pilot weight matrix set before determining the second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, determining the candidate pilot weight matrix set, and then The candidate pilot weight matrix is selected in a certain manner to select an alternative pilot weight matrix as the second pilot weight matrix.
  • the specific implementation process includes the following possible ways:
  • the first possible manner is: if the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, before determining the second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, If M is 1, the network device determines the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE.
  • the determining, by the network device, the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to the UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE includes: the network device according to the weight of one UE Constructing a channel main eigenvector and a precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE, using a second formula, determining an alternative pilot weighting matrix set, wherein the second formula is expressed as:
  • the network device directly according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE.
  • the second formula determines the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices with a small amount of computation.
  • the second possible manner is: if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, according to the reconstructed channel of each of the M scheduled UEs Before the primary eigenvector determines the second pilot weighting matrix, if M is 2, the network device determines the target weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel primary eigenvectors corresponding to the two UEs respectively, and then, when the two UEs respectively correspond to the reconstructed channel When the correlation of the primary eigenvectors is less than the first preset threshold, the network device determines the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices according to the precoding codewords corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix.
  • the determining, by the network device, the target weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to the two UEs includes: determining, by the network device, the reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to the two UEs by using a third formula The target weight matrix, wherein the third formula is expressed as:
  • determining, by the network device, the candidate pilot weight matrix set according to the precoding codeword and the target weight matrix corresponding to the two UEs includes: the network device according to the precoding codewords and target rights corresponding to the two UEs
  • the value matrix determines the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices using a fourth formula, wherein the fourth formula is expressed as:
  • the network device first determines the target weight matrix corresponding to the two UEs, and the specific determining manner is, for example, a third formula. In general, the target weight matrix corresponding to each UE The corresponding power is the same. Then, the correlation of the reconstructed channel main feature vectors corresponding to the two UEs is compared. When the correlation between the reconstructed channel main feature vectors of the two UEs is less than the first preset threshold, the downlink channels corresponding to the two UEs are not The interference or the interference is small, wherein the first preset threshold is generally 1.
  • the first preset threshold may be determined according to an actual situation, and is not specifically limited herein, and the network device is based on the target weight matrix and two The precoding codewords corresponding to the UEs respectively determine a corresponding set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, and the specific determining manner is the fourth formula.
  • a third possible manner is: if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, according to the reconstructed channel of each of the M scheduled UEs Before the main feature vector determines the second pilot weight matrix, if the M is greater than or equal to 2, the network device first determines the target weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the at least two UEs respectively; when any two UEs correspond to the target When the correlation of the weight matrix is less than the second preset threshold, the network device determines the candidate pilot weight matrix set according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix.
  • determining, by the network device, the candidate pilot weight matrix set according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix comprises: precoding corresponding to the at least two UEs by the network device The codeword and the target weight matrix determine the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices using a fifth formula, wherein the fifth formula is expressed as:
  • the network device first determines target rights corresponding to the at least two UEs.
  • the value matrix is determined by the third formula.
  • the power corresponding to the target weight matrix corresponding to each UE is the same.
  • the second preset threshold is determined by the network device according to the actual situation, for example, the second preset threshold is 1, where the second preset threshold is determined by the network device. No specific restrictions.
  • the specific implementation process includes the following: Several possible ways:
  • the first possible manner is: if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, according to the reconstructed channel main feature of each of the M scheduled UEs Determining, by the vector, the second pilot weighting matrix comprises: the network device randomly selecting the target precoding codeword, and selecting the candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the target precoding matrix, the network The device determines the candidate pilot weight matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword as the second pilot weight matrix.
  • the network device randomly selects a precoding codeword from the N precoding codewords corresponding to the N UEs. Decoding a codeword, and selecting, from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set, an candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword according to the target precoding codeword, and then preparing the target precoding codeword corresponding to the target Selecting a pilot weighting matrix as the second pilot weighting matrix, wherein the mode is used for the second pilot weighting matrix determined under the non-measurement subframe, and the second pilot weighting matrix is used for the next pilot signal Weighted transmission, thereby improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the second possible manner is: if the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, determining the second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs includes: The network device determines the target precoding codeword according to a preset rule, and selects an alternative pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the target precoding matrix, and then the network device pre-targets the target The candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the encoded codeword is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  • the determining, by the network device, the target precoding codeword according to the preset rule includes: determining, by the network device, the target precoding codeword by using a sixth formula, where the sixth formula is expressed as:
  • n denotes the sequence number of the measurement subframe before the measurement subframe s m
  • Indicates that the measurement subframe is an alternate pilot weight matrix corresponding to s m .
  • the network device determines the target precoding codeword according to the sixth formula, and selects the target precoding codeword from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the target precoding codeword.
  • Corresponding candidate pilot weight matrix is used as the second pilot weight matrix, wherein the mode is used to measure a second pilot weight matrix determined under the subframe, and the second pilot weight matrix is used for the next pilot.
  • the frequency signal is weighted and transmitted, and the second pilot weighting matrix and the target precoding codeword are used for weighted transmission of the primary data signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the network device may further determine the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix, and the specific implementation process includes the following possible manners:
  • the first possible manner is: if the first pilot weight matrix is a preset pilot weight matrix, determining the second guide according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs
  • the frequency weighting matrix includes: if the M is 1, the network device first acquires a target weight matrix of the UE, and then the network device determines the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix of the UE. .
  • the network device determines the first pilot weighting matrix satisfying the seventh formula as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  • the network device first acquires a target weight matrix of the UE, and according to the first pilot weight matrix Determining the target pilot weight matrix with the target weight matrix of the one UE, and the specific determining manner is the seventh formula, where the method is used to measure the target pilot weight matrix determined under the subframe, where the target pilot The weighting matrix is used to weight the next pilot signal to effectively improve the downlink signal. The accuracy of the road.
  • the network device further needs to determine a target precoding codeword, and weight the next data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix to improve accuracy of the downlink channel. After the network device may determine the second pilot weight matrix, and the target precoding codeword is not determined, the network device determines the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix. The network device determines the target precoding codeword by using the eighth formula, wherein the eighth formula is expressed as:
  • the network device after determining the second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, the network device sends the first weighted data signal to the N UEs, wherein the first weighted data signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix.
  • the network device weights the first data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix, thereby obtaining a first weighted data signal, where the first data signal includes control information, etc., and the first weighting
  • the data signal is sent to the N UEs to improve the accuracy of the downlink channel, and the TM4 in the MIMO system is suitable for downlink transmission to the MU, thereby effectively reducing signal interference between the MUs.
  • a second aspect of the present invention provides a network device configured to implement the functions of the method provided by the first aspect above.
  • the function may be implemented by hardware or by executing corresponding software implemented by hardware, and the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • the network device includes: a receiving module, a first determining module, a second determining module, a third determining module, and a sending module.
  • a receiving module configured to receive N precoding matrix indication PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, the N PMIs are determined by the N user equipment UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device, where the A weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weighting matrix.
  • the first determining module is configured to determine N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix received by the receiving module.
  • a second determining module configured to determine M scheduled UEs from the N UEs.
  • a third determining module configured to determine a second pilot weighting matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs determined by the second determining module, where M is an integer not greater than N .
  • a sending module configured to send the second weighted pilot signal determined by the third determining module to the N UEs, where the second weighted pilot signal is determined by the network device according to the second pilot weighting matrix pair The second pilot signal is weighted.
  • a third aspect of the present invention provides a network device including a processor, a memory, a bus system, and an input/output I/O device, wherein the processor, the memory, and the I/O device are connected by a bus system, wherein the memory is stored
  • the I/O device is configured to receive N precoding matrix indication PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are determined by the N user equipment UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device.
  • the first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix.
  • the processor 301 is configured to determine N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix.
  • the processor 301 is further configured to determine M scheduled UEs from the N UEs, and determine a second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, where Where M is an integer not greater than N.
  • the I/O device 304 is further configured to send the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs, where the second weighted pilot signal is used by the network device according to the second pilot weight matrix to the second The frequency signal is weighted.
  • a fourth aspect of the present invention provides a downlink transmission system, including a network device and N user equipment UEs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the network device is in communication connection with the N UEs;
  • the network device is the network device described in the foregoing second aspect or any optional implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • a fifth aspect of the present invention provides a computer storage medium storing the above The program of the downlink transmission described in the first aspect or any alternative implementation of the first aspect.
  • the network device receives N PMIs, where the N PMIs are determined according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device, and the first weighted pilot signals are the network. And the weighting of the first pilot signal by the device according to the first pilot weighting matrix. After the network device weights the first pilot signal, the UE does not see the first pilot signal, nor does it pass the first guide.
  • the frequency signal determines the PMI, and the UE actually sees the first weighted pilot signal, which is determined by the first weighted pilot signal for downlink channel estimation, thereby expanding the PMI selection range, because the N
  • the PMI is not the quantization of the real downlink channel, but the quantization of the downlink channel weighted by the first pilot weight matrix to the first pilot signal. Therefore, the network device needs to perform the corresponding inverse transform to correctly restore the real downlink channel. And determining, by the network device, the N reconstructed channel primary eigenvectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weighting matrix, and determining M scheduled UEs from the N UEs, and then according to the M scheduled UEs.
  • Each of The reconstructed channel main feature vector of the UE determines the second pilot weight matrix, so that the second pilot signal can be weighted by the second weight matrix to obtain the second weighted pilot signal, and the second weighted pilot signal is obtained.
  • the method is sent to N UEs, thereby reducing the quantization error of the downlink channel, better suppressing interference between users, and improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • 1 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of downlink transmission in the prior art
  • FIG. 2 is a network architecture diagram of a MIMO system according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a downlink transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a downlink transmission method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario of a downlink transmission method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 7 is another schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 8 is another schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • precoding codebook a matrix or vector for quantizing a MIMO channel set in a long term evolution (LTE) protocol, wherein the precoding codebook is represented as
  • Each precoding codebook includes a plurality of precoding matrices, wherein the precoding matrix is represented as B denotes a precoding codebook size, the number of rows N T of the matrix represents the number of antennas of the network device, the column number r represents the rank of the precoding matrix, and i represents the index of each codeword W in the precoding codebook.
  • rank is the rank based on the precoding codebook w.
  • each PMI codeword is an N T -dimensional complex sequence vector.
  • each codeword is a complex matrix of N T ⁇ 2.
  • the rank may be determined by the UE according to the downlink signaling sent by the network device, or may be selected by the UE according to the current channel, and the UE feeds back the rank adopted by the UE while feeding back the PMI.
  • pilot weighting matrix a pilot signal matrix for weighting multiple antennas is N T unitary matrix of dimension.
  • CSI is accurate instantaneous channel state information.
  • the CSI fed back by the UE includes a PMI, a channel quality indicator (CQI). .
  • channel main feature vector The channel coefficient matrix is singular value decomposition (SVD), and the right singular vector corresponding to the largest singular value is the main eigenvector of the channel.
  • the term "measurement subframe” the network device transmits a CRS in each subframe, the UE performs downlink channel estimation on the CRS in each subframe, and the downlink channel estimation result is used for data channel demodulation of the subframe, but the UE The downlink channel estimation result is used to calculate CSI only in a partial subframe, and these subframes are measurement subframes.
  • the subframes whose downlink channel estimation results are only used for demodulation are referred to as non-measurement subframes, and the measurement subframes are configured by the network device according to the LTE protocol, and all UEs served by the UE are notified by signaling.
  • the technical solution of the embodiments of the present invention may be applied to a MIMO system, where the MIMO technology refers to using multiple transmit antennas at the transmitting end, using multiple receiving antennas at the receiving end, and transmitting signals through multiple antennas at the transmitting end. Multi-antenna reception at the receiving end, thereby effectively improving the signal transmission efficiency.
  • the network device includes: a network device and a user equipment, where the network device sends data to the user equipment by means of downlink transmission, and the user equipment sends data to the network device by means of uplink transmission.
  • the user equipment can communicate with one or more core networks via a radio access network (RAN), and the user equipment can refer to (user equipment, UE), access user equipment, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, Mobile station, remote station, remote user equipment, mobile device, wireless communication device, user agent or user device.
  • the access user equipment may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), and a wireless device.
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • the network device may be a device for communicating with the user equipment, for example, may be a GSM system or a base transceiver station (BTS) in CDMA, or may be a network device (nodeB, NB) in a WCDMA system.
  • BTS base transceiver station
  • the network device 300 includes a processor 301, a memory 302, a bus system 303, and an input/output (I/O) device 304.
  • the processor 301, the memory 302, and the I/O device 304 are connected by the bus system 303, wherein the memory 302 stores one or more programs, and the memory 302 is used to the processor. 301 providing operation instructions and data included in the one or more programs;
  • the I/O device 304 is configured to receive N precoding matrix indication PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are determined by the N user equipment UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device.
  • the first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix;
  • the processor 301 is configured to determine N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix;
  • the processor 301 is further configured to determine M scheduled UEs from the N UEs, and determine a second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, where Where M is an integer not greater than N;
  • the I/O device 304 is further configured to send the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs, where the second weighted pilot signal is used by the network device according to the second pilot weight matrix to the second The frequency signal is weighted.
  • the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix.
  • the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine, according to the N PMIs, precoding codewords corresponding to the N PMIs, determine a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the first a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to a pilot weighting matrix; the first pilot weight matrix, the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the first according to the precoding codewords corresponding to the N PMIs
  • a conjugate transpose matrix corresponding to a pilot weight matrix determines the N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors.
  • the processor 301 is specifically configured to: according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the N PMIs, the first pilot weight matrix, and the conjugate transpose moment corresponding to the N precoding codewords And the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weighting matrix determines the N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors by using a first formula, wherein the first formula is expressed as:
  • PrimEigVec represents the main feature vector of the matrix
  • L represents the total number of measurement subframes within the preset length
  • m is the measurement subframe number.
  • Representing a first pilot weighting matrix in which the measurement subframe is s m Determining a PMI selected by the user equipment u after channel estimation of the first pilot signal of the measurement subframe s m , Indicates that the PMI is Corresponding precoding codeword, Express Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix, Express Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix.
  • the processor 301 may determine the candidate pilot weight matrix set before determining the second pilot weight matrix, and select the second pilot weight matrix from the candidate pilot weight matrix set, and according to The second pilot weighting matrix weights the second pilot signal to obtain a second weighted pilot signal, and sends the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs to improve the accuracy of the downlink channel, where the second pilot The signal is weighted by the first pilot signal for the next transmitted pilot signal for weighting.
  • there are many ways to determine the set of alternative pilot weighting matrices The following are some possible ways:
  • the processor 301 is further configured to determine, according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, if the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix Before the two pilot weighting matrix, if M is 1, the candidate pilot weighting matrix set is determined according to the reconstructed channel primary eigenvector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE.
  • the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine, by using a second formula, the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to a reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to one UE and a precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE, where , the second formula is expressed as:
  • the processor 301 directly determines the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to one UE, and the specific determining manner is as follows, and the calculation amount is small.
  • the processor 301 is further configured to: if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, according to the M scheduled UEs Before the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each UE determines the second pilot weight matrix, if M is 2, the target weight matrix is determined according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the two UEs; when the two UEs respectively correspond When the correlation of the reconstructed channel main feature vector is less than the first preset threshold, the candidate pilot weight matrix set is determined according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix.
  • the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine, according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the two UEs, the target weight matrix by using a third formula, where the third formula is expressed as:
  • the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine, according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix, the candidate pilot weighting matrix set by using a fourth formula, where The fourth formula is expressed as:
  • the processor 301 first determines target weights corresponding to the two UEs.
  • Matrix the way to determine the target weight matrix is as in the third formula.
  • the candidate pilot weight matrix is determined according to the target weight matrix and the precoding codewords corresponding to the two UEs respectively.
  • the specific method of determination is the fourth formula.
  • the processor 301 is further configured to: if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, according to the M scheduled UEs Before the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each UE determines the second pilot weight matrix, if M is greater than or equal to 2, the target weight matrix is determined according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the at least two UEs respectively; When the correlation of the target weight matrix corresponding to the UE is less than the second preset threshold, the candidate pilot weight matrix set is determined according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix.
  • the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine, according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix, the candidate pilot weighting matrix set by using a fifth formula, where the The five formula is expressed as:
  • the processor 301 first determines a target weight matrix corresponding to the at least two UEs, and the manner of determining the target weight matrix is as follows. When the correlation of the target weight matrix corresponding to any two of the at least two UEs is less than the second preset threshold, determining the candidate according to the target weight matrix and the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs The set of pilot weighting matrices is determined in a manner such as the fifth formula.
  • the second pilot weight matrix is determined from the candidate pilot weight matrix set.
  • the second pilot weight matrix is determined from the candidate pilot weight matrix set.
  • the processor 301 is specifically configured to randomly select a target precoding codeword, and select, according to the target precoding matrix, the target precoding codeword corresponding to the target pilot precoding matrix An alternative pilot weighting matrix; the candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  • the processor 301 randomly selects a precoding codeword corresponding to any one of the UEs as the target precoding codeword, and
  • the candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword is used as the second pilot weighting matrix, where the mode is used for the second pilot weighting matrix determined under the non-measurement subframe, and the second pilot weighting matrix
  • the second pilot signal For performing weighted transmission on the next pilot signal, for example, according to the second pilot weight matrix, the second pilot signal (the first pilot signal is downlink weighted for the next downlink weighted pilot signal) And weighting the second weighted pilot signal, and transmitting the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs, thereby improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine a target precoding codeword according to a preset rule, and according to the target precoding matrix, the candidate guide The candidate weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword is selected in the frequency weighting matrix; the candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  • the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine the target pre-coded codeword by using a sixth formula, where the sixth formula is expressed as:
  • n denotes the sequence number of the measurement subframe before the measurement subframe s m
  • Indicates that the measurement subframe is an alternate pilot weight matrix corresponding to s m .
  • the second pilot weighting matrix As the second pilot weighting matrix.
  • the processor 301 determines the target precoding codeword from the precoding codewords corresponding to the N UEs according to the sixth formula, and prepares the target precoding codewords. Selecting a pilot weighting matrix as the second pilot weighting matrix, wherein the method is used to measure a second pilot weighting matrix determined under a subframe, and the second pilot weighting matrix is used for the next pilot signal Weighted transmission, the second pilot weight matrix and the target precoding codeword are used for the next data signal Weighted transmission, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the second pilot weight matrix may also be determined according to the first pilot weight matrix, and the following may be introduced in several ways:
  • the processor 301 is specifically configured to acquire a target weight matrix of a UE if M is 1, according to the first guide.
  • the second weighting matrix is determined by a frequency weighting matrix and a target weight matrix of the one UE.
  • the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine whether the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix satisfy the seventh formula, where the seventh formula is expressed as:
  • Qmod(m, L) represents the first pilot weighting matrix of the measurement subframe number in the L measurement subframes, m, and ⁇ represents the constraint threshold; the first formula will be satisfied
  • a pilot weighting matrix is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  • the processor 301 first acquires a target weight matrix of the UE, and according to the first The pilot weighting matrix and the target weight matrix of the one UE determine the second pilot weight matrix, and the specific determining manner is the seventh formula, where the method is used to measure the second pilot weighting matrix determined under the subframe.
  • the second pilot weight matrix is used for weighted transmission of the next pilot signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the processor 301 is further configured to determine the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix, determine a target precoding codeword by using an eighth formula, where The eighth formula is expressed as:
  • the processor 301 is further configured to: after determining the second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, send the first weighted data signal Up to the N UEs, wherein the first weighted data signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weighting matrix.
  • the processor 301 first determines the second pilot weight matrix, and determining the target precoding codeword according to the eighth formula, where The second pilot weight matrix and the target precoding codeword are used for weighted transmission of the next data signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the I/O device 304 receives N PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are the first weighted pilot signals transmitted by the N UEs according to the I/O device 304. Determining, the first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the processor 301 weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix, and after the processor 301 weights the first pilot signal, the UE actually sees It is not the first pilot signal, nor the PMI is determined by the first pilot signal, and the UE actually sees the first weighted pilot signal, and the PMI is determined by using the first weighted pilot signal for downlink channel estimation.
  • the selection range of the PMI is expanded, because the N PMIs are not the quantization of the real downlink channel, but the quantization of the downlink channel weighted by the first pilot weight matrix by the first pilot weight matrix, therefore, the processor 301
  • the corresponding inverse transform is required to correctly restore the real downlink channel, and the processor 301 determines N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix, and then determines M of the N UEs from the N UEs.
  • the scheduled UE is then based on the M scheduled UEs
  • the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each UE determines a second pilot weight matrix, so that the second pilot signal can be weighted by the second weight matrix to obtain a second weighted pilot signal and passed through the I/O device.
  • the second weighted pilot signal is sent to the N UEs, thereby reducing the quantization error of the downlink channel, better suppressing interference between users, and improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the processor 301 may also be referred to as a central processing unit (CPU).
  • Memory 302 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to processor 301.
  • a portion of the memory 302 may also include non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM).
  • NVRAM non-volatile random access memory
  • the specific components of the network device 300 are coupled together by a bus system 303 in a specific application.
  • the bus system 303 may include a power bus, a control bus, a status signal bus, and the like in addition to the data bus. However, for clarity of description, various buses are labeled as bus system 303 in FIG.
  • Processor 301 may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, each step of the above method may pass through the integrated logic circuit of the hardware in the processor 301 or soft. The instructions in the form of pieces are completed.
  • the processor 301 described above may be a general purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or discrete hardware. Component.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA off-the-shelf programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be implemented or carried out.
  • the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented by the hardware decoding processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 302, and the processor 301 reads the information in the memory 302 and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a downlink transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the downlink transmission method is applied to a MIMO system, and the specific process is as follows:
  • Step 401 The network device determines a first pilot signal used for downlink channel estimation.
  • the first pilot signal is used by the UE to perform channel estimation on the downlink channel. Therefore, the network device first determines the first pilot signal.
  • the first pilot signal is a single frequency, and the network device is random. Selecting a part of the communication signal as the first pilot signal or determining the first pilot signal according to a preset rule, for example, the network device side has a pilot signal dedicated for downlink channel estimation.
  • Step 402 The network device determines a first pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot signal.
  • the network device does not directly send the first pilot signal to the UE, but first determines a first pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot signal, where the first pilot weight matrix is A precursor pilot weighting matrix for weighting the first pilot signal.
  • the first pilot weight matrix may be an identity matrix, or may be a unitary matrix set in advance for the first pilot signal. Since the pilot weighting matrix is not used in the prior art to weight the pilot signal, Therefore, the first pilot weighting matrix used for weighting the pilot signal for the first time may be at least one of an identity matrix and a preset pilot weighting matrix, when the first pilot is used by using the first pilot weighting matrix for the first time. After the signal is weighted, the next pilot weight matrix is determined as a weighting of the next pilot signal, which is not specifically limited herein.
  • Step 403 The network device weights the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix to obtain a first weighted pilot signal, and sends the first weighted pilot signal to the N UEs.
  • the first weighted pilot signal is used by the N UEs for downlink channel estimation, and according to the downlink.
  • the result of the channel estimation determines N PMIs, and then transmits the determined N PMIs to the network device, where N is an integer greater than one.
  • the network equipment obtains the first weighted pilot signal by weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix, and the N UEs perform channel estimation on the first weighted pilot signal according to the existing channel estimation method, and the effect thereof is obtained.
  • the downlink channel seen by the UE is transformed by the first pilot weight matrix. What the UE actually sees is not the first pilot signal, nor is the PMI determined by the first pilot signal, and the UE actually sees the first weighting.
  • the pilot signal is determined by the first weighted pilot signal for downlink channel estimation, thereby expanding the PMI selection range.
  • Step 404 The N UEs determine N PMIs according to the first weighted pilot signal.
  • the N UEs perform downlink channel estimation according to the received first weighted pilot signal, and determine a corresponding PMI according to the result of the downlink channel estimation, wherein, in order to improve the accuracy of the PMI, each UE according to the received first weighted pilot signal The PMI corresponding to the precoding codeword with the best downlink channel quality is selected.
  • Step 405 The N UEs send the N PMIs to the network device.
  • the N UEs Since the N PMIs are used by the network device to determine N reconstructed channel primary eigenvectors, the N UEs send the respective determined PMIs to the network device.
  • Step 406 The network device receives the N PMIs sent by the N UEs.
  • the network device receives the N PMIs sent by the N UEs, and may locally cache the N PMIs, so that the N PMIs are obtained in time for subsequent use.
  • Step 407 The network device determines N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix.
  • the N PMIs determined by the N UEs are not the quantization of the real downlink channel, but the downlink channel after the first pilot weight matrix transformation. Quantization, therefore, the corresponding inverse transformation needs to be performed on the network device side to correctly restore the real downlink channel.
  • the specific method is to determine the main features of the N reconstructed channels according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weighting matrix fed back by the N UEs. vector.
  • the network device determines, according to the N PMIs, N precoding codewords corresponding to the N PMIs, and then the network device determines the N a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the precoding codewords and a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix, the first pilot weight matrix, the N according to the N precoding codewords
  • the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the precoding codewords and the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix determine the N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors.
  • the network device first determines corresponding N precoding codewords according to the N PMIs, and the pilot powers that are weighted by the first pilot signal are unchanged, and are kept N, because there is a corresponding relationship between the PMI and the precoding codewords.
  • the correlation between the PMI codewords before and after the rotation is unchanged, and the first pilot weighting matrix is constrained to be a unitary matrix, and the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords and the conjugate corresponding to the first pilot weighting matrix are determined. Transpose matrix.
  • the network device determines, according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix.
  • the network device determines, according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix.
  • the network device determines, according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix by using the first formula. Reconstructing the channel main feature vector, wherein the first formula is expressed as:
  • PrimEigVec represents the main feature vector of the matrix
  • L represents the total number of measurement subframes within the preset length
  • m is the measurement subframe number.
  • Representing a first pilot weighting matrix in which the measurement subframe is s m Determining a PMI selected by the user equipment u after channel estimation of the first pilot signal of the measurement subframe s m , Indicates that the PMI is Corresponding precoding codeword, Express Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix, Express Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix.
  • Step 408 The network device determines M scheduled UEs from the N UEs.
  • the network device determines to be scheduled according to the N reconstructed channel primary feature vectors and N CQIs of the N UEs.
  • the UE wherein the CQIs of the N UEs are stored locally in the network device, therefore, the network device can directly obtain the CQIs of the N UEs locally.
  • Step 409 The network device reconstructs a channel according to each of the M scheduled UEs.
  • the main feature vector determines a second pilot weighting matrix.
  • the network device Before the network device determines the second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, the network device generally determines the candidate pilot weight matrix set first, and prepares according to the preset rule.
  • the selected pilot weighting matrix selects an alternative pilot weighting matrix as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  • the network device determines, according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE.
  • a set of alternative pilot weighting matrices if the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, if M is 1, the network device determines, according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE.
  • the network device may determine the second pilot weight matrix by using a second formula according to a reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to a UE and a precoding codeword corresponding to the first UE, where the second formula represents for:
  • the network device directly according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to one UE according to the second The formula determines the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices with a small amount of computation.
  • the network device respectively reconstructs according to the two UEs.
  • a channel principal feature vector determines a target weight matrix
  • the network device determines the candidate pilot according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix when the correlation between the reconstructed channel main feature vectors of the two UEs is less than a first preset threshold.
  • a set of weighting matrices are used to determine the candidate pilot according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix when the correlation between the reconstructed channel main feature vectors of the two UEs is less than a first preset threshold.
  • the network device may determine the target weight matrix by using a third formula according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the two UEs, where the third formula is expressed as:
  • the network device determines, according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix, a candidate pilot weighting matrix set by using a fourth formula, where the fourth formula is expressed as:
  • the network device first determines a target weight matrix corresponding to the two UEs.
  • the specific determining manner is the third formula.
  • the power corresponding to the target weight matrix corresponding to each UE is the same.
  • the correlation of the reconstructed channel main feature vectors corresponding to the two UEs is compared. When the correlation between the reconstructed channel main feature vectors of the two UEs is less than the first preset threshold, the downlink channels corresponding to the two UEs are not The interference or the interference is small, wherein the first preset threshold is generally 1.
  • the first preset threshold may be determined according to an actual situation, and is not specifically limited herein, and the network device is based on the target weight matrix and two The precoding codewords corresponding to the UEs respectively determine a corresponding set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, and the specific determining manner is the fourth formula.
  • the network device respectively corresponds to at least two UEs. Reconstructing the channel main feature vector to determine the target weight matrix;
  • the network determines an alternative pilot weighting matrix set according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix.
  • the network device may determine, according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix, the candidate pilot weighting matrix set by using a fifth formula, where the fifth formula is expressed as:
  • the network device first determines target rights corresponding to the at least two UEs.
  • the value matrix is determined by the third formula.
  • the power corresponding to the target weight matrix corresponding to each UE is the same.
  • the network device determines, according to the target weight matrix and the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs.
  • the second set of preset thresholds is determined by the network device according to the actual situation, for example, the second preset threshold is 1, This is not specifically limited.
  • an alternative pilot weighting matrix may be selected from the pilot weighting matrix set to determine the second pilot weighting matrix, wherein the second is determined.
  • pilot weighting matrix There are many ways to use the pilot weighting matrix. Here are a few ways that you might implement:
  • the network device first randomly selects a target precoding codeword, and according to the target precoding code Selecting, from the candidate pilot weighting matrix, the candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword, and then determining, by the network device, the candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword as the second Pilot weighting matrix.
  • the network device randomly selects a precoding codeword from the N precoding codewords corresponding to the N UEs. Decoding a codeword, and selecting, from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set, an candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword according to the target precoding codeword, and then preparing the target precoding codeword corresponding to the target Selecting a pilot weighting matrix as the second pilot weighting matrix, wherein the mode is used for non-measurement A second pilot weighting matrix determined under the subframe, the second pilot weighting matrix is used for weighted transmission of the next pilot signal, thereby improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the network device selects a precoding codeword from the N corresponding N precoding codewords according to a preset rule to determine the target pre- Encoding a codeword, and selecting an candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the target precoding codeword, and then selecting the candidate pilot corresponding to the target precoding codeword
  • the weighting matrix is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  • the network device may determine the target pre-encoded codeword by using a sixth formula, where the sixth formula is expressed as:
  • n denotes the sequence number of the measurement subframe before the measurement subframe s m
  • Indicates that the measurement subframe is an alternate pilot weight matrix corresponding to s m .
  • the network device determines the target precoding codeword according to the sixth formula, and selects the target precoding codeword from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the target precoding codeword.
  • Corresponding candidate pilot weight matrix is used as the second pilot weight matrix, wherein the mode is used to measure a second pilot weight matrix determined under the subframe, and the second pilot weight matrix is used for the next pilot.
  • the frequency signal is weighted and transmitted, and the second pilot weighting matrix and the target precoding codeword are used for weighted transmission of the primary data signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the network device may further determine the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix, wherein there are many ways to determine the second pilot weight matrix, and the following are possible ways. :
  • the network device acquires a target weight matrix of the UE, and then according to the first pilot weight matrix The target weight matrix of the one UE determines the second pilot weight matrix.
  • the network device determines whether the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix satisfy the seventh formula, wherein the seventh formula is expressed as:
  • the network device determines the first pilot weighting matrix satisfying the seventh formula as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  • the network device first acquires a target weight matrix of the UE, and according to the first pilot weight matrix Determining the target pilot weight matrix with the target weight matrix of the one UE, and the specific determining manner is the seventh formula, where the method is used to measure the target pilot weight matrix determined under the subframe, where the target pilot The weighting matrix is used for weighted transmission of the next pilot signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the network device further needs to determine a target precoding codeword, and weight the next data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix to improve accuracy of the downlink channel. Since the network device may first determine the second pilot weighting matrix and does not determine the target precoding codeword, the network device determines the target precoding codeword by using the eighth formula, wherein the eighth formula is expressed as:
  • the first pilot weight matrix is a preset pilot weight matrix
  • the network device first determines the target pilot weight matrix, and determining the target precoding codeword according to the eighth formula, where the second guide The frequency weighting matrix and the target precoding codeword are used for weighted transmission of the next data signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • Step 410 The network device weights the second pilot signal according to the second pilot weight matrix to obtain a second weighted pilot signal.
  • Step 411 The network device sends the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs.
  • the network device After determining the second pilot weight matrix, the network device weights the second pilot signal according to the second pilot weight matrix, thereby obtaining a second weighted pilot signal, and sending the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs, thereby improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 introduces a process in which a network device first determines a second pilot weight matrix, and then weights the second pilot signal according to the second pilot weight matrix to obtain a second weighted pilot signal, where possible.
  • the network device weights the first data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix, thereby obtaining a first weighted data signal, where the first data signal includes control information, etc., and the A weighted data signal is sent to the N UEs to improve the accuracy of the downlink channel, and the TM4 in the MIMO system is suitable for downlink transmission to the MU, thereby effectively reducing signal interference between the MUs.
  • a schematic diagram of an application scenario of the downlink transmission method in the embodiment of the present disclosure includes:
  • the network device is used as the base station, and the first pilot signal and the second pilot signal are both CRS:
  • the base station determines a CRS for downlink channel estimation, and generates a first pilot weight matrix according to the CRS. If the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, the base station buffers the generated first pilot weight matrix, the first guide A frequency weighting matrix is used to weight the CRS.
  • the base station performs weighting processing on the CRS according to the first pilot weight matrix to obtain a weighted pilot signal, that is, a first weighted pilot signal, and sends the first weighted pilot signal to N UEs, where N is greater than An integer of 1 such that the N UEs perform downlink channel estimation according to the first weighted pilot signal, and the N UEs determine N PMIs and N CQIs of the corresponding downlink channel according to the result of the downlink channel estimation, and then, N The UE feeds back the N PMIs and the N CQIs to the base station, and the base station locally buffers the N PMIs and N CQIs received from the N UEs for subsequent direct use.
  • the base station performs channel reconstruction according to the determined first pilot weight matrix and the N PMIs received from the N UEs, because the N PMIs determined by the N UEs are not the quantization of the real channel, but are subjected to the first pilot weighting. Quantization of the downlink channel after the matrix transformation. Therefore, the base station side needs to perform the corresponding inverse transform to correctly restore the real downlink channel.
  • the specific method is that the base station determines N according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix.
  • Reconstructing the channel main feature vector wherein the specific process of determining the N reconstructed channel main feature vectors is: recording that the downlink channel of UE u is H u (N R ⁇ N T complex matrix, and N R is the number of UE receiving antenna ports, N T is the number of antenna ports transmitted by the base station), and the base station weights the CRS by using the first pilot weight matrix Q T (N R ⁇ N T complex matrix) used in the subframe t, but to maintain the CRS weighted pilot
  • the power is unchanged, and the correlation before and after the rotation of the PMI codeword is kept unchanged, and the first pilot weight matrix is constrained to be a unitary matrix.
  • the measurement subframe is denoted as s 1 , s 2 ... s m
  • the base station maintains a queue of length L for each UE u
  • Que Wgt for storing the used first pilot weight matrix, the queue is from the beginning to the end, and each time a measurement subframe s m is used, the subframe is used.
  • First pilot weighting matrix used by t In the queue Que Wgt the base station receives the UE u calculated for the measurement subframe s m Then queue it
  • the base station determines N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors (hereinafter abbreviated as reconstructed channels) as follows:
  • PrimEigVec represents the main feature vector of the matrix
  • L represents the total number of measurement subframes within the preset length
  • m is the measurement subframe number.
  • Representing a first pilot weighting matrix in which the measurement subframe is s m Indicates the PMI selected by the user equipment u after channel estimation for the CRS of the measurement subframe s m , Indicates that the PMI is Corresponding precoding codeword, Express Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix, Express Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix.
  • the specific approach is: seeking The SVD is then taken to the right singular vector corresponding to its largest singular value.
  • the reconstructed channel is equal to the result of the latest channel reconstruction calculation, and the reconstructed channel is used together with the fed back CQI as a downlink scheduling module (for determining the number of users scheduled) Input.
  • the base station After the base station determines the reconstructed channel, the cached user CQI is obtained, and the base station determines whether the single-user scheduling or the multi-user scheduling is performed according to the CQI and the result of the reconstructed channel, that is, determining M scheduled UEs from the N UEs, where M is not An integer greater than N. If the scheduling module decides to schedule only one UE in the subframe t, the reconstructed channel of one UE As the target weight for downlink transmission.
  • the step of the Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is to transform a set of N N-dimensional vectors ⁇ X 1 , X 2 , X N ⁇ into a set of standard orthogonal sets.
  • each column represents the transmission weight of each paired user
  • the PMI codebook defined by the LTE protocol has such a property that each column of each codeword matrix is orthogonal, and since the matrix matrix transformation maintains the correlation between vectors, it must be guaranteed.
  • the columns are also orthogonal, and there is a unitary matrix that strictly satisfies the above formula.
  • the present invention proposes the following method for solving the candidate pilot weighting matrix set based on scheduling constraints:
  • the correlation between the CR-BF weights of any two paired users must be lower than a preset threshold z ⁇ (0,1), namely:
  • the weight vector of the weight matrix is 0.5
  • the weight vector sent by the two users is 1, that is: Since the weight has the following important properties, the correlation between the weights of the two users is equal to the correlation between the reconstructed channels, namely:
  • the calculation of the set of alternative pilot weighting matrices depends on the selected PMI.
  • the impact of channel reconstruction performance In principle, in the channel reconstruction window, it is desirable that the first pilot weight matrix rotates the channel as uniformly as possible, so that the PMI quantization error is uniformly distributed, and the quantization error can be reduced by the reconstruction operation, that is, from the candidate pilot.
  • the second pilot weighting matrix is selected as the weighted transmission of the next CRS, and the target precoding codeword corresponding to the second pilot weight matrix and the second pilot weight matrix are used as the weighted transmission of the next data signal. . Therefore, the present invention proposes a selection method of the second pilot weighting matrix as follows:
  • the second pilot weighting matrix of the CRS as the subframe s 0 is:
  • the meaning of the formula is: in the measurement sub-frame s m , calculate the rotation matrix corresponding to all possible pre-coded code words W i Then the determined pilot weighting matrix of the previous measurement subframes one by one Compare, select the precoding codeword that maximizes the minimum distance Weighting of data signals for subframe s m , corresponding candidate pilot weighting matrix
  • the second pilot weighting matrix of the CRS as the subframe s m is:
  • A [a 1 , a 2 ,...a N ]
  • B [b 1 ,b 2 ,...b N ]
  • the third type in the non-measurement subframe s, the CR-BF weight calculated according to the scheduling result of the subframe is recorded as
  • W i ⁇ w r (r is the number of scheduled users of the subframe s) is selected in an arbitrary manner, and the calculation is performed. Any of the ways referred to herein include random selection, or the same selection as the measurement sub-frame, or remain consistent with the PMI used in the previous measurement sub-frame.
  • the accuracy of the downlink channel is improved by weighting the CRS and channel reconstruction.
  • the precoding codeword can achieve the effect of non-codebook based BF.
  • the accuracy of channel reconstruction is maximized by selecting the second pilot weighting matrix of the most uniform rotation channel in the candidate pilot weight matrix.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario embodiment of a downlink transmission method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, where a specific process includes:
  • the base station sets the first pilot weight matrix in advance, and weights the first pilot signal according to the preset first pilot weight matrix.
  • the specific first pilot weight matrix form includes but is not limited to the following three types:
  • the first is the MUB weighting matrix:
  • N T is an integer power of 2
  • the total structure can comprise (N T +1) orthonormal basis of MUB:
  • each base vector in each set of standard orthogonal bases is arranged in a matrix to obtain (N T +1) unitary matrices:
  • the second is the Kerdock weighting matrix:
  • each element in the matrix only takes values in ⁇ 0, ⁇ 1, ⁇ j ⁇ . This feature is beneficial to reduce the storage overhead of the offline weight matrix and the computational overhead when weighting.
  • the third is the phase rotation weighting matrix:
  • antenna arrays can be divided into two sets of polarization directions.
  • antenna port numbers 0 to (N T /2-1) are assigned to one polarization direction antenna, and antenna ports are used.
  • the number N T /2 to (N T -1) is assigned to the antenna of the other polarization direction.
  • the first pilot weight matrix is in the following form:
  • the first pilot weight matrix is in the following form:
  • An example of a rotational phase value is:
  • the first pilot signal is weighted using the respective matrices in the set in the measurement subframe.
  • the measurement subframe is s 0 , s 1 , s 2 , . . .
  • the measurement subframe is only used for SU scheduling.
  • the reason why the MU is not used is that the preset first pilot weighting matrix cannot guarantee that the transmission weight is consistent with the precoding codeword.
  • the demodulation performance of the UE is lost, and the robustness of the SU is strong, and the demodulation loss is high.
  • the impact on user rate is small, and if MU is used, the user rate loss may be large.
  • Adding a constraint based on the existing SU scheduling criteria requires that a precoding matrix can be found for the scheduled users.
  • the correlation between the CR-BF weights and the CR-BF weights is not lower.
  • a certain threshold Specifically, in measuring the subframe s m , suppose the CR-BF weight of a certain UEu is The first pilot weighting matrix used is Qmod(m,L), and the increased scheduling constraint is:
  • the threshold value ranges from ⁇ (0,1), and the larger the constraint, the stricter the constraint.
  • the selected precoding matrix is: among them, Represents the target precoding codeword. After determining the target precoding codeword, the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weighting matrix are used for weighted transmission of the next data signal.
  • the MU scheduling in the non-measurement subframe, the scheduling criterion modification, the CR-BF weight calculation, the second pilot weight matrix calculation and the PMI selection are similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, except that in the non-measurement subframe There is no need to consider the influence of the first pilot weighting matrix on channel reconstruction, so the PMI can be arbitrarily chosen.
  • the network device 700 is a device in a multiple input multiple output system
  • the network device 700 includes: a receiving module 701, a first determining module 702, and a second determining Module 703, third determining module 704 and transmitting module 705.
  • the receiving module 701 is configured to receive N precoding matrix indication PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are determined by the N user equipment UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device.
  • the first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix;
  • the first determining module 702 is configured to determine N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix received by the receiving module 701;
  • a second determining module 703, configured to determine M scheduled UEs from the N UEs;
  • a third determining module 704 configured to determine, according to the second determining module 703, the M Determining, by the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the scheduled UEs, a second pilot weighting matrix, where M is an integer not greater than N;
  • the sending module 705 is configured to send the second weighted pilot signal determined by the third determining module 704 to the N UEs, where the second weighted pilot signal is determined by the network device
  • the second pilot weight matrix is weighted by the second pilot signal.
  • the receiving module 701 receives N PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are determined by the N UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device, and The first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix.
  • the pilot signal does not determine the PMI by using the first pilot signal, and the UE actually sees the first weighted pilot signal, which is determined by using the first weighted pilot signal for downlink channel estimation, thereby expanding the PMI.
  • the selection range of the PMI since the N PMIs are not the quantization of the real downlink channel, but the quantization of the downlink channel weighted by the first pilot weight matrix by the first pilot weight matrix, therefore, the network device needs to respond
  • the inverse transform can correctly restore the real downlink channel, and the network device determines N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix, and the second determining module 703 determines M from the N UEs. Being scheduled The UE, and then the third determining module 704 determines the second pilot weighting matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs determined by the second determining module 703, so that the first pilot weighting matrix can be adopted.
  • the second weighting matrix weights the second pilot signal to obtain the second weighted pilot signal, and the sending module 705 sends the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs, thereby reducing the quantization error of the downlink channel and better suppressing the inter-user The interference improves the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • FIG. 8 is another schematic structural diagram of a network device 700.
  • the network device 700 includes: a receiving module 701, a first determining module 702, a second determining module 703, a third determining module 704, and a sending module 705, and a fourth determining. Module 706.
  • the receiving module 701 is configured to receive N precoding matrix indication PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are determined by the N user equipment UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device.
  • the first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix.
  • the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, preset At least one of the pilot weighting matrices.
  • the first pilot weighting matrix is a target pilot weighting matrix determined by the last pilot weighting, and is used to weight the pilot signal of this time. Since the pilot signal is not weighted in the prior art, the pilot is initially used.
  • the signal-weighted first pilot weighting matrix is at least one of a unit weighting matrix and a preset pilot weighting matrix, and the target pilot weighting matrix determined by weighting the second pilot signal is used as the third first guiding And frequency-weighting the matrix, and weighting the third pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix, and so on, which is not specifically limited herein.
  • the first determining module 702 is configured to determine N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix received by the receiving module 701.
  • the first determining module 702 determines a plurality of reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix.
  • One possible manner includes:
  • the first determining module 702 is specifically configured to determine N precoding codewords corresponding to the N PMIs according to the N PMIs; determine a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix; the first pilot weight matrix, the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoded codewords according to the N precoding codewords The conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix determines the N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors.
  • the first determining module 702 is specifically configured to: according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, and the conjugate transitions corresponding to the N precoding codewords
  • the set matrix and the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix determine the N reconstructed channel main feature vectors by using a first formula, wherein the first formula is expressed as:
  • PrimEigVec represents the main feature vector of the matrix
  • L represents the total number of measurement subframes within the preset length
  • m is the measurement subframe number.
  • Representing a first pilot weighting matrix in which the measurement subframe is s m Determining a PMI selected by the user equipment u after channel estimation of the first pilot signal of the measurement subframe s m , Indicates that the PMI is Corresponding precoding codeword, Express Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix, Express Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix.
  • the second determining module 703 is configured to determine M scheduled UEs from the N UEs.
  • a third determining module 704 configured to determine a second pilot weighting matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs determined by the second determining module 703, where An integer not greater than N.
  • the third determining module 704 determines the candidate pilot weight matrix before determining the second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs. The set, and then selects an alternative pilot weighting matrix as the second pilot weighting matrix in a certain manner in the candidate pilot weighting matrix set.
  • the specific implementation process includes the following possible ways:
  • the first possible mode is: a fourth determining module 706, configured to: if the first pilot weight matrix is the unit weight matrix, the third determining module 704 is configured according to the M scheduled UEs Before the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each UE determines the second pilot weight matrix, if the M is 1, the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE are determined. Select the pilot weighting matrix set.
  • the fourth determining module 706 is specifically configured to determine, by using a second formula, an alternative pilot weighting according to a reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to one UE and a precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE. a set of matrices, wherein the second formula is expressed as:
  • the network device directly according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE.
  • the second formula determines the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices with a small amount of computation.
  • the second possible mode is: the fourth determining module 706 is configured to: if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of the unit weight matrix and the preset pilot weight matrix, the third The determining module 704 determines, according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, the second pilot weighting matrix, if the M is 2, according to the reconstructed channel corresponding to the two UEs respectively The main feature vector determines a target weight matrix; when the two UEs respectively correspond to the reconstructed channel main feature direction When the correlation of the quantity is less than the first preset threshold, the candidate pilot weight matrix set is determined according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix.
  • the fourth determining module 706 is specifically configured to determine, according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the two UEs, the target weight matrix by using a third formula, where the third formula is Expressed as:
  • the fourth determining module 706 is specifically configured to determine, according to the precoding codewords corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix, a fourth pilot formula to determine an candidate pilot weighting matrix set.
  • the fourth formula is expressed as:
  • the network device first determines target weights corresponding to the two UEs.
  • the matrix is determined in a specific manner, such as the third formula. Generally, the power corresponding to the target weight matrix corresponding to each UE is the same.
  • the correlation of the reconstructed channel main feature vectors corresponding to the two UEs is compared. When the correlation between the reconstructed channel main feature vectors of the two UEs is less than the first preset threshold, the downlink channels corresponding to the two UEs are not Less interference or interference, wherein the first pre- The threshold is generally set to 1.
  • the first preset threshold may be determined according to an actual situation, and is not specifically limited herein.
  • the network device determines the corresponding preparation according to the target weight matrix and the precoding codewords corresponding to the two UEs respectively.
  • the pilot weighting matrix set is selected, and the specific determination manner is as the fourth formula.
  • a third possible module is: a fourth determining module 706, configured to: if the first pilot weight matrix is the unit weight matrix and the preset pilot weight matrix, the third determining module is configured according to the Before the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs determines the second pilot weighting matrix, if the M is greater than or equal to 2, the reconstructed channel main features corresponding to the at least two UEs respectively The vector determines a target weight matrix; when the correlation of the target weight matrix corresponding to any two UEs is less than a second preset threshold, determining according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix A set of alternative pilot weighting matrices.
  • the fourth determining module 706 is specifically configured to determine, by using a fifth formula, an alternative pilot weighting matrix set according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix.
  • the fifth formula is expressed as:
  • the network device first determines target rights corresponding to the at least two UEs.
  • the value matrix is determined by the third formula.
  • the power corresponding to the target weight matrix corresponding to each UE is the same.
  • the second preset threshold is determined by the network device according to the actual situation, for example, the second preset threshold is 1, where the second preset threshold is determined by the network device. No specific restrictions.
  • the candidate pilot weighting matrix is selected from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set as the second pilot weighting matrix according to a preset manner.
  • the specific implementation process includes the following possible ways:
  • the first possible mode is: if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of the unit weight matrix and the preset pilot weight matrix, the third determining module 704 is specifically configured to randomly select Obtaining a target precoding codeword, and selecting, from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set, an candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword according to the target precoding matrix; and using the target precoding codeword A corresponding candidate pilot weighting matrix is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  • the network device randomly selects a precoding codeword from the N precoding codewords corresponding to the N UEs. Decoding a codeword, and selecting, from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set, an candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword according to the target precoding codeword, and then preparing the target precoding codeword corresponding to the target Selecting a pilot weighting matrix as the second pilot weighting matrix, wherein the mode is used for the second pilot weighting matrix determined under the non-measurement subframe, and the second pilot weighting matrix is used for the next pilot signal Weighted transmission, thereby improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the second possible mode is: when the first pilot weight matrix is the unit weight matrix, the third determining module 704 is specifically configured to determine a target precoding codeword according to a preset rule, and according to the Selecting, by the target precoding matrix, an candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword from the candidate pilot weighting matrix; determining an candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword as The second pilot weighting matrix is described.
  • the third determining module 707 is specifically configured to determine the target pre-coded codeword by using a sixth formula, where the sixth formula is expressed as:
  • n denotes the sequence number of the measurement subframe before the measurement subframe s m
  • Indicates that the measurement subframe is an alternate pilot weight matrix corresponding to s m .
  • the network device determines the target precoding codeword according to the sixth formula, and selects the target precoding codeword from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the target precoding codeword.
  • Corresponding candidate pilot weight matrix is used as the second pilot weight matrix, wherein the mode is used to measure a second pilot weight matrix determined under the subframe, and the second pilot weight matrix is used for the next pilot.
  • the frequency signal is weighted and transmitted, and the second pilot weighting matrix and the target precoding codeword are used for weighted transmission of the primary data signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the network device may further determine the second guide according to the first pilot weight matrix.
  • the frequency weighting matrix the specific implementation process includes the following possible ways:
  • the first possible mode is: if the first pilot weight matrix is the preset pilot weight matrix, the third determining module 704 is specifically configured to acquire a UE target if the M is 1. a weight matrix; determining the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix of the one UE.
  • the third determining module 704 is specifically configured to determine whether the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix satisfy a seventh formula, where the seventh formula is expressed as:
  • Qmod(m, L) represents a first pilot weighting matrix with measurement subframe number m in L measurement subframes, ⁇ represents a constraint threshold; and the seventh formula will be satisfied
  • the first pilot weighting matrix is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  • the network device first acquires a target weight matrix of the UE, and according to the first pilot weight matrix Determining the target pilot weight matrix with the target weight matrix of the one UE, and the specific determining manner is the seventh formula, where the method is used to measure the target pilot weight matrix determined under the subframe, where the target pilot The weighting matrix is used for weighted transmission of the next pilot signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the network device further needs to determine a target precoding codeword, and weight the next data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix to improve accuracy of the downlink channel.
  • the fourth determining module 706 is further configured to use, according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix, that the network device may determine the second pilot weight matrix and determine the target precoding codeword.
  • the target precoding codeword is determined by using an eighth formula, wherein the eighth formula is expressed as:
  • a sending module 705, configured to determine, by the third determining module 704, the second weighted pilot signal The number is sent to the N UEs, wherein the second weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the second pilot signal according to the second pilot weight matrix.
  • the sending module 705 is further configured by the third determining module 704 to determine a second pilot according to a reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs.
  • the first weighted data signal is sent to the N UEs, wherein the first weighted data signal is determined by the network device according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix Weighted from the first data signal.
  • the network device weights the first data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix, thereby obtaining a first weighted data signal, where the first data signal includes control information, etc., and the first weighting
  • the data signal is sent to the N UEs to improve the accuracy of the downlink channel, and the TM4 in the MIMO system is suitable for downlink transmission to the MU, thereby effectively reducing signal interference between the MUs.
  • the disclosed system, apparatus, and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of cells is only a logical function division.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or integrated. Go to another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present invention may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated in one unit.
  • the above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software functional unit.
  • An integrated unit if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product, can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present invention which is essential or contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium.
  • a number of instructions are included to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the various embodiments of the present invention.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like. .

Abstract

Disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention are a downlink transmission method and a network device, used for solving the existing problem wherein transmission mode 4 (TM4) in a multiple-input multiple-output system is not suitable for use in performing downlink transmission for multiple users (MU). The method comprises: a network device receiving N precoding matrix indicators PMI, the N PMI being determined by N user equipments (UE) according to a first weighted pilot signal sent by the network device, the first weighted pilot signal being determined by the network device weighting a first pilot signal according to a first pilot weighting matrix; the network device determining N reconstruction channel primary feature vectors according to the N PMI and the first pilot weighting matrix; the network device determining M scheduled UE from within the N UE and determining a second pilot weighting matrix according to a reconstruction channel primary feature vector of each of the M scheduled UE; and the network device sending a second weighted pilot signal to the N UE, the second weighted pilot signal being obtained by the network device weighting a second pilot signal according to a second pilot weighting matrix.

Description

一种下行传输方法及网络设备Downlink transmission method and network device 技术领域Technical field
本发明涉及通信领域,具体涉及一种下行传输方法及网络设备。The present invention relates to the field of communications, and in particular, to a downlink transmission method and a network device.
背景技术Background technique
在多输入多输出(multi-input multi-output,MIMO)系统中,由于时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)制式中的上下行信道的互易性(channel reciprocity)成立,网络设备通过对用户设备(user equipment,UE)发送的上行参考信号进行检测获得准确的瞬时下行信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI),从而能够进行准确的波束赋形发送。而频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)制式中的上下行信道的互易性一般不成立,网络设备不能直接使用上行信道估计结果发送下行波束赋形,而是采取固定的码本用于信道特征方向量化,UE根据下行信道估计结果,在码本中选择基于某种准则下最优的预编码码字,并向网络设备反馈其索引,即:预编码矩阵指示(precoding matrix indicator,PMI),网络设备检测到PMI后,使用PMI对应的预编码码字对下行数据信号作加权发送。In a multi-input multi-output (MIMO) system, since the channel reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels in the time division duplex (TDD) system is established, the network device passes the user. The uplink reference signal sent by the user equipment (UE) is detected to obtain accurate instantaneous downlink channel state information (CSI), so that accurate beamforming transmission can be performed. The reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels in the frequency division duplex (FDD) system is generally not established. The network device cannot directly use the uplink channel estimation result to transmit the downlink beamforming, but adopts a fixed codebook for the channel. Feature direction quantization, the UE selects an optimal precoding codeword based on a certain criterion in the codebook according to the downlink channel estimation result, and feeds back an index to the network device, that is, a precoding matrix indicator (PMI) After detecting the PMI, the network device uses the precoding codeword corresponding to the PMI to perform weighted transmission on the downlink data signal.
在MIMO系统的传输模式(transmission mode,TM)4中,FDD制式中的网络设备和UE存储同一套规定的预编码码本,其中,预编码码本包含若干个预编码矩阵。在通信过程中,如图1所示,网络设备向UE发送导频信号,例如:小区专用参考信号(cell specific reference signal,CRS),UE通过检测该CRS来估计下行信道,按照其内部设定的准则选取当前下行信道估计结果在预编码码本中的最优量化结果,将其作为PMI向网络设备发送出去,网络设备检测到UE发送的PMI,将PMI对应的预编码矩阵设置为下行单用户(single-user,SU)预编码矩阵。In the transmission mode (TM) 4 of the MIMO system, the network device and the UE in the FDD system store the same set of precoding codebooks, wherein the precoding codebook includes a plurality of precoding matrices. In the communication process, as shown in FIG. 1, the network device sends a pilot signal, for example, a cell-specific reference signal (CRS), to the UE, and the UE estimates the downlink channel by detecting the CRS, according to its internal setting. The criterion selects the optimal quantization result of the current downlink channel estimation result in the pre-coded codebook, and sends it as the PMI to the network device. The network device detects the PMI sent by the UE, and sets the precoding matrix corresponding to the PMI as the downlink single. User (single-user, SU) precoding matrix.
由于TM4采用基于预编码码本的预编码矩阵,其中,在3GPP的相关协议中定义了2天线端口的码本,包括4个2维复向量作为秩(rank)=1的PMI码字;以及4天线端口的码本,包括16个4维复向量作为Rank=1的PMI码字。对于SU而言,UE能够从该16个PMI码字中选取到与实际下行信道匹配的PMI码字,然后网络设备根据UE选取的PMI码字确定预编码矩阵,但是,对于多用户(multiple-user,MU)而言,该16个PMI码字与各个UE对 应的实际下行信道的量化误差很大,各个UE从该16个PMI码字中选取的PMI码字与各个UE对应的实际下行信道不匹配,则网络设备根据该各个UE选取的PMI码字确定预编码矩阵,并对下行数据信号作加权发送会造成严重的用户干扰。Since TM4 adopts a precoding matrix based on a precoding codebook, wherein a codebook of 2 antenna ports is defined in a related protocol of 3GPP, and four 2-dimensional complex vectors are included as PMI codewords of rank=1; The codebook of the 4 antenna port includes 16 4-dimensional complex vectors as the PMI codeword of Rank=1. For the SU, the UE can select a PMI codeword that matches the actual downlink channel from the 16 PMI codewords, and then the network device determines the precoding matrix according to the PMI codeword selected by the UE, but for multiple users (multiple- User, MU), the 16 PMI codewords and each UE pair The quantization error of the actual downlink channel is large, and the PMI codeword selected by each UE from the 16 PMI codewords does not match the actual downlink channel corresponding to each UE, and the network device determines according to the PMI codeword selected by each UE. The precoding matrix and weighted transmission of the downlink data signal can cause serious user interference.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本发明实施例提供了一种下行传输方法及网络设备,用于解决现有多输入多输出系统的TM4不适用于对MU进行下行传输的问题。The embodiment of the invention provides a downlink transmission method and a network device, which are used to solve the problem that the TM4 of the existing multiple input multiple output system is not suitable for downlink transmission to the MU.
本发明第一方面提供一种下行传输方法,该方法应用于多输入多输出系统,利用本发明的技术方案,多输入多输出系统的TM4不仅适用于对SU进行下行传输,而且适用于对MU进行下行传输,该方法包括:网络设备接收N个PMI,其中,N为大于1的整数,该N个PMI是N个UE根据网络设备发送的第一加权导频信号作下行信道估计,并根据下行信道估计的结果所确定的,该第一加权导频信号是由网络设备根据第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权得到的,该网络设备根据该N个PMI和第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量,该网络设备从该N个UE中确定M个被调度的UE,并根据该M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵,其中,M为不大于N的整数,该网络设备将第二加权导频信号发送至该N个UE,其中,该第二加权导频信号是由网络设备根据第二导频加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权得到的。The first aspect of the present invention provides a downlink transmission method, which is applied to a multiple input multiple output system. With the technical solution of the present invention, the TM4 of the multiple input multiple output system is not only suitable for downlink transmission to the SU, but also applicable to the MU. Performing downlink transmission, the method includes: the network device receives N PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are downlink channel estimates by the N UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device, and according to Determining, by the result of the downlink channel estimation, the first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix, and the network device is configured according to the N PMIs and the first pilot Determining, by the weighting matrix, N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors, the network device determining M scheduled UEs from the N UEs, and reconstructing channel main eigenvectors according to each of the M scheduled UEs Determining a second pilot weighting matrix, where M is an integer not greater than N, and the network device sends a second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs, where the second weighted pilot signal is determined by the network device According to the second pilot of the second pilot signal weight matrix obtained by frequency weighting.
与现有技术不同的是,网络设备接收N个PMI,其中,N为大于1的整数,该N个PMI是N个UE根据该网络设备发送的第一加权导频信号所确定的,而该第一加权导频信号是该网络设备根据该第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权得到的,当该网络设备对第一导频信号加权后,UE真实所见的并非第一导频信号,也不是通过第一导频信号确定PMI的,而UE真实所见的是第一加权导频信号,是通过该第一加权导频信号作下行信道估计后确定PMI的,从而扩大了PMI的选择范围,由于该N个PMI并不是真实下行信道的量化,而是经过第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权后的下行信道的量化,因此,该网络设备需要做对应的逆变换才能正确还原出真实下行信道,则该网络设备根据该N个PMI和第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量,再从该 N个UE中确定M个被调度的UE,然后根据M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵,这样,就可以通过该第二加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权得到第二加权导频信号,并将该第二加权导频信号发送至N个UE,从而减少了下行信道的量化误差,更好地抑制用户间的干扰,提高了下行信道的精度。Different from the prior art, the network device receives N PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are determined by the N UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device, and the The first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix. When the network device weights the first pilot signal, the UE actually sees that it is not the first guide. The frequency signal is not determined by the first pilot signal, and the UE actually sees the first weighted pilot signal, which is determined by the first weighted pilot signal for downlink channel estimation, thereby expanding the PMI. The selection range of the PMI, since the N PMIs are not the quantization of the real downlink channel, but the quantization of the downlink channel weighted by the first pilot weight matrix by the first pilot weight matrix, therefore, the network device needs to perform corresponding The inverse transform can correctly restore the real downlink channel, and the network device determines N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix, and then Determining M scheduled UEs among the N UEs, and then determining a second pilot weighting matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, so that the second weighting matrix can be adopted Weighting the second pilot signal to obtain a second weighted pilot signal, and transmitting the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs, thereby reducing quantization error of the downlink channel, better suppressing interference between users, and improving The accuracy of the downlink channel.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该第一导频加权矩阵是上一次导频加权确定的目标导频加权矩阵,用于对这一次的导频信号加权,由于现有技术中并没有对导频信号加权,因此初次对导频信号加权的第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,将第二次导频信号加权后确定的目标导频加权矩阵作为第三次的第一导频加权矩阵,并根据该第一导频加权矩阵对第三次的导频信号加权,以此类推,此处不做具体限定。In some possible implementation manners, the first pilot weighting matrix is a target pilot weighting matrix determined by a previous pilot weighting, used to weight the pilot signal of this time, since the pilot is not used in the prior art. Signal weighting, so the first pilot weighting matrix weighting the pilot signal for the first time is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, and the target pilot weight matrix determined by weighting the second pilot signal The third pilot weighting matrix is used as the third pilot weighting matrix, and the third pilot signal is weighted according to the first pilot weighting matrix, and so on, which is not specifically limited herein.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该网络设备根据该N个PMI和第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量的方式有很多种,一种可能的方式包括:网络设备首先根据该N个PMI确定该N个PMI对应的N个预编码码字,然后网络设备确定该N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及该第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵,其次,网络设备根据该N个预编码码字,该第一导频加权矩阵,该N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及该第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵确定该N个重构信道主特征向量。由于该N个PMI并不是真实下行信道的量化,而是经过第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权后的下行信道的量化,因此,该网络设备通过确定该N个重构信道主特征向量以正确还原出真实下行信道。In some possible implementation manners, the network device determines, according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix, N reconstructed channel main feature vectors in a plurality of manners. One possible manner includes: the network device first according to the manner The N PMIs determine N precoding codewords corresponding to the N PMIs, and then the network device determines a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords and a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix And second, the network device, according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the conjugate transpose corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix The matrix determines the N reconstructed channel main feature vectors. Since the N PMIs are not the quantization of the real downlink channel, but the quantization of the downlink channel weighted by the first pilot weight matrix by the first pilot weight matrix, the network device determines the N reconstructed channel masters. The feature vector is used to correctly restore the true downlink channel.
在一些可能的实现方式中,网络设备根据该N个预编码码字,该第一导频加权矩阵,该N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及该第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵确定该N个重构信道主特征向量包括:网络设备根据该N个预编码码字,该第一导频加权矩阵,该N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及该第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵利用第一公式确定该N个重构信道主特征向量,其中,该第一公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, the network device, according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the first pilot weight matrix The conjugate transposed matrix determines the N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors, the network device, according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, and the conjugate transpose corresponding to the N precoding codewords The matrix and the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weighting matrix determine the N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors by using a first formula, wherein the first formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000001
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000002
表示子 帧t上确定的用户设备u的重构信道主特征向量,PrimEigVec表示求取矩阵的主特征向量,L表示预设长度内测量子帧的总个数,m是测量子帧序号,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000003
表示测量子帧为sm的第一导频加权矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000004
表示用户设备u对测量子帧sm的第一导频信号作信道估计后选择的PMI,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000005
表示PMI为
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000006
对应的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000007
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000008
对应的共轭转置矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000009
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000010
对应的共轭转置矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000001
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000002
Representing the reconstructed channel main feature vector of the user equipment u determined on the subframe t, PrimEigVec represents the main feature vector of the matrix, L represents the total number of measurement subframes within the preset length, and m is the measurement subframe number.
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000003
Representing a first pilot weighting matrix in which the measurement subframe is s m ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000004
Determining a PMI selected by the user equipment u after channel estimation of the first pilot signal of the measurement subframe s m ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000005
Indicates that the PMI is
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000006
Corresponding precoding codeword,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000007
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000008
Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000009
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000010
Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix.
为了使得第一导频信号加权后的导频功率不变,且保持PMI被旋转前后的相关性不变,则网络设备约束该第一导频加权矩阵为酉矩阵,然后网络设备在本地维持一个队列,用于存储第一导频加权矩阵,维持另一个队列,用于存储各个UE反馈的PMI,并通过上述第一公式确定N个重构信道主特征向量。In order to make the pilot power weighted by the first pilot signal unchanged, and keep the correlation of the PMI before and after the rotation unchanged, the network device constrains the first pilot weight matrix to be a unitary matrix, and then the network device maintains a local The queue is configured to store the first pilot weight matrix, and maintain another queue for storing the PMI fed back by each UE, and determine N reconstructed channel main feature vectors by using the first formula.
在一些可能的实现方式中,根据该M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,先确定备选导频加权矩阵集,然后在该备选导频加权矩阵集中按照某种方式选取某个备选导频加权矩阵作为该第二导频加权矩阵,具体实现过程包括下面几种可能的方式:In some possible implementations, before determining the second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, determining the candidate pilot weight matrix set, and then The candidate pilot weight matrix is selected in a certain manner to select an alternative pilot weight matrix as the second pilot weight matrix. The specific implementation process includes the following possible ways:
第一种可能的方式为:若该第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵,根据该M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,若M为1,网络设备根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和该一个UE对应的预编码码字确定备选导频加权矩阵集。The first possible manner is: if the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, before determining the second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, If M is 1, the network device determines the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE.
在一些可能的是实现方式中,网络设备根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和该一个UE对应的预编码码字确定备选导频加权矩阵集包括:网络设备根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和该一个UE对应的预编码码字利用第二公式确定备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,该第二公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, the determining, by the network device, the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to the UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE, includes: the network device according to the weight of one UE Constructing a channel main eigenvector and a precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE, using a second formula, determining an alternative pilot weighting matrix set, wherein the second formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000011
其中,Wi∈w1
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000012
表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示秩rank=1的PMI为i的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000013
表示一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量,w1表示rank=1的PMI码本。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000011
Among them, W i ∈w 1 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000012
Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword of rank rank=1 with a PMI of i,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000013
Represents a reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to one UE, and w 1 represents a PMI codebook with rank=1.
可见,若被调度的为单用户,且该第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵,则网络设备直接根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和该一个UE对应的预编码码字按照上述第二公式确定该备选导频加权矩阵集,计算量小。 It can be seen that, if the single pilot is scheduled to be a single user, and the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, the network device directly according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE. The second formula determines the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices with a small amount of computation.
第二种可能的方式为:若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,若M为2,网络设备根据两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量确定目标权值矩阵,然后当该两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量的相关性小于第一预设阈值时,网络设备根据该两个UE对应的预编码码字和该目标权值矩阵确定备选导频加权矩阵集。The second possible manner is: if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, according to the reconstructed channel of each of the M scheduled UEs Before the primary eigenvector determines the second pilot weighting matrix, if M is 2, the network device determines the target weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel primary eigenvectors corresponding to the two UEs respectively, and then, when the two UEs respectively correspond to the reconstructed channel When the correlation of the primary eigenvectors is less than the first preset threshold, the network device determines the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices according to the precoding codewords corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix.
在一些可能的实现方式中,网络设备根据两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量确定目标权值矩阵包括:网络设备根据两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量利用第三公式确定该目标权值矩阵,其中,该第三公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, the determining, by the network device, the target weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to the two UEs includes: determining, by the network device, the reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to the two UEs by using a third formula The target weight matrix, wherein the third formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000014
,其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000015
表示目标权值矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000016
表示u1对应的重构信道主特征向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000017
表示u2对应的重构信道主特征向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000018
表示u1对应的权值向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000019
表示u2对应的权值向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000020
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000021
的共轭转置矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000022
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000023
的共轭转置矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000024
表示对角阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000014
,among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000015
Represents the target weight matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000016
Representing the reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to u 1 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000017
Representing the reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to u 2 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000018
Represents the weight vector corresponding to u 1 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000019
Represents the weight vector corresponding to u 2 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000020
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000021
Conjugate transposed matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000022
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000023
Conjugate transposed matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000024
Represents a diagonal array.
在一些可能的实现方式中,网络设备根据两个UE对应的预编码码字和目标权值矩阵确定备选导频加权矩阵集包括:网络设备根据两个UE对应的预编码码字和目标权值矩阵利用第四公式确定备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,该第四公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, determining, by the network device, the candidate pilot weight matrix set according to the precoding codeword and the target weight matrix corresponding to the two UEs includes: the network device according to the precoding codewords and target rights corresponding to the two UEs The value matrix determines the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices using a fourth formula, wherein the fourth formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000025
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000026
表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示rank=2的PMI为i的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000027
表示目标权值矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000025
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000026
Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword of rank=2 with a PMI of i,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000027
Represents the target weight matrix.
可见,若被调度的为两个用户,且若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和 预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,则网络设备首先确定该两个UE对应的目标权值矩阵,具体的确定方式如第三公式,一般情况下,每个UE对应的目标权值矩阵对应的功率是相同的。然后比较该两个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量的相关性,当两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量的相关性小于第一预设阈值时,两个UE对应的下行信道没有干扰或者干扰较小,其中,该第一预设阈值一般为1,该第一预设阈值可根据实际情况而定,此处不做具体限定,网络设备才根据该目标权值矩阵和两个UE分别对应的预编码码字确定对应的备选导频加权矩阵集,具体的确定方式如第四公式。It can be seen that if two users are scheduled, and if the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix and For at least one of the preset pilot weighting matrices, the network device first determines the target weight matrix corresponding to the two UEs, and the specific determining manner is, for example, a third formula. In general, the target weight matrix corresponding to each UE The corresponding power is the same. Then, the correlation of the reconstructed channel main feature vectors corresponding to the two UEs is compared. When the correlation between the reconstructed channel main feature vectors of the two UEs is less than the first preset threshold, the downlink channels corresponding to the two UEs are not The interference or the interference is small, wherein the first preset threshold is generally 1. The first preset threshold may be determined according to an actual situation, and is not specifically limited herein, and the network device is based on the target weight matrix and two The precoding codewords corresponding to the UEs respectively determine a corresponding set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, and the specific determining manner is the fourth formula.
第三种可能的方式为:若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,若M大于或等于2,网络设备先根据至少两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量确定目标权值矩阵;当任意两个UE对应的目标权值矩阵的相关性小于第二预设阈值时,网络设备根据该至少两个UE对应的预编码码字和该目标权值矩阵确定备选导频加权矩阵集。A third possible manner is: if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, according to the reconstructed channel of each of the M scheduled UEs Before the main feature vector determines the second pilot weight matrix, if the M is greater than or equal to 2, the network device first determines the target weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the at least two UEs respectively; when any two UEs correspond to the target When the correlation of the weight matrix is less than the second preset threshold, the network device determines the candidate pilot weight matrix set according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix.
在一些可能的实现方式中,网络设备根据该至少两个UE对应的预编码码字和该目标权值矩阵确定备选导频加权矩阵集合包括:网络设备根据该至少两个UE对应的预编码码字和目标权值矩阵利用第五公式确定备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,该第五公式表示为:In some possible implementations, determining, by the network device, the candidate pilot weight matrix set according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix comprises: precoding corresponding to the at least two UEs by the network device The codeword and the target weight matrix determine the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices using a fifth formula, wherein the fifth formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000028
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000029
表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示rank≥2的PMI为i的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000030
表示目标权值矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000028
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000029
Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword with a rank ≥ 2 and a PMI of i,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000030
Represents the target weight matrix.
可见,若被调度的为至少两个用户,且若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,网络设备首先确定该至少两个UE对应的目标权值矩阵,具体的确定方式如第三公式,一般情况下,每个UE对应的目标权值矩阵对应的功率是相同的。当至少两个UE中的任意两个UE分别对应的目标权值矩阵的相关性小于第二预设阈值时,才根据该目标权值矩阵和至少两个UE对应的预编码码字确定该备选导频加权矩阵集,具体的确定方式如第五公式,在实际应用中,该第二预设阈值是由网络设备根据实际情况而定,例如,该第二预设阈值为1,此处不做具体限定。 It can be seen that if at least two users are scheduled, and if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, the network device first determines target rights corresponding to the at least two UEs. The value matrix is determined by the third formula. Generally, the power corresponding to the target weight matrix corresponding to each UE is the same. When the correlation of the target weight matrix corresponding to any two of the at least two UEs is less than the second preset threshold, determining the preparation according to the target weight matrix and the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs The second preset threshold is determined by the network device according to the actual situation, for example, the second preset threshold is 1, where the second preset threshold is determined by the network device. No specific restrictions.
当确定备选导频加权矩阵集后,则根据某种预设方式从该备选导频加权矩阵集中选取某个备选导频加权矩阵作为该第二导频加权矩阵,具体实现过程包括下面几种可能的方式:After determining the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, selecting an alternative pilot weighting matrix from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set as the second pilot weighting matrix according to a preset manner, the specific implementation process includes the following: Several possible ways:
第一种可能的方式为:若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,根据M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵包括:网络设备随机选取目标预编码码字,并根据目标预编码矩阵从备选导频加权矩阵集中选取目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵,网络设备将目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵确定为该第二导频加权矩阵。The first possible manner is: if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, according to the reconstructed channel main feature of each of the M scheduled UEs Determining, by the vector, the second pilot weighting matrix comprises: the network device randomly selecting the target precoding codeword, and selecting the candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the target precoding matrix, the network The device determines the candidate pilot weight matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword as the second pilot weight matrix.
可见,若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,网络设备从N个UE对应的N个预编码码字中随机选取某个预编码码字作为该目标预编码码字,并根据该目标预编码码字从该备选导频加权矩阵集中选取该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵,然后将目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵作为该第二导频加权矩阵,其中,该方式用于非测量子帧下确定的第二导频加权矩阵,该第二导频加权矩阵用于对下一次的导频信号作加权发送,从而提高下行信道的精度。It can be seen that, if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, the network device randomly selects a precoding codeword from the N precoding codewords corresponding to the N UEs. Decoding a codeword, and selecting, from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set, an candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword according to the target precoding codeword, and then preparing the target precoding codeword corresponding to the target Selecting a pilot weighting matrix as the second pilot weighting matrix, wherein the mode is used for the second pilot weighting matrix determined under the non-measurement subframe, and the second pilot weighting matrix is used for the next pilot signal Weighted transmission, thereby improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
第二种可能的方式为:若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵,根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵包括:网络设备按照预设规则确定目标预编码码字,并根据该目标预编码矩阵从备选导频加权矩阵集中选取目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵,然后网络设备将该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵确定为该第二导频加权矩阵。The second possible manner is: if the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, determining the second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs includes: The network device determines the target precoding codeword according to a preset rule, and selects an alternative pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the target precoding matrix, and then the network device pre-targets the target The candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the encoded codeword is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
在一些可能的实现方式中,网络设备按照预设规则确定该目标预编码码字包括:网络设备利用第六公式确定该目标预编码码字,其中,该第六公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, the determining, by the network device, the target precoding codeword according to the preset rule includes: determining, by the network device, the target precoding codeword by using a sixth formula, where the sixth formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000031
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000032
表示目标预编码码字,n表示测量子帧sm之前的测量子帧的序号,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000033
表示测量子帧为sm对应的备选导频加权矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000031
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000032
Indicates the target precoding codeword, and n denotes the sequence number of the measurement subframe before the measurement subframe s m ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000033
Indicates that the measurement subframe is an alternate pilot weight matrix corresponding to s m .
可见,若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵,网络设备按照第六公式确定目标预编码码字,并根据该目标预编码码字从备选导频加权矩阵集中选取该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵作为该第二导频加权矩阵,其中,该方式用于测量子帧下确定的第二导频加权矩阵,该第二导频加权矩阵用于对下一次的导频信号作加权发送,该目第二导频加权矩阵和该目标预编码码字用于对一次的数据信号作加权发送,从而有效提高下行信道的精度。It can be seen that if the first pilot weighting matrix is a unit weighting matrix, the network device determines the target precoding codeword according to the sixth formula, and selects the target precoding codeword from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the target precoding codeword. Corresponding candidate pilot weight matrix is used as the second pilot weight matrix, wherein the mode is used to measure a second pilot weight matrix determined under the subframe, and the second pilot weight matrix is used for the next pilot The frequency signal is weighted and transmitted, and the second pilot weighting matrix and the target precoding codeword are used for weighted transmission of the primary data signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
在实际应用中,网络设备还可以根据该第一导频加权矩阵中确定该第二导频加权矩阵,具体实现过程包括下面可能的方式:In a practical application, the network device may further determine the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix, and the specific implementation process includes the following possible manners:
第一种可能的方式为:若第一导频加权矩阵为预设的导频加权矩阵,根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定该第二导频加权矩阵包括:若M为1,网络设备先获取一个UE的目标权值矩阵,然后网络设备根据该第一导频加权矩阵和该一个UE的目标权值矩阵确定该第二导频加权矩阵。The first possible manner is: if the first pilot weight matrix is a preset pilot weight matrix, determining the second guide according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs The frequency weighting matrix includes: if the M is 1, the network device first acquires a target weight matrix of the UE, and then the network device determines the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix of the UE. .
在一些可能的实现方式中,网络设备根据该第一导频加权矩阵和该一个UE的目标权值矩阵确定该第二导频加权矩阵包括:网络设备首先判断该第一导频加权矩阵和该目标权值矩阵是否满足第七公式,其中,该第七公式表示为:In some possible implementations, determining, by the network device, the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix of the one UE, the network device first determining the first pilot weight matrix and the Whether the target weight matrix satisfies the seventh formula, wherein the seventh formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000034
其中,Wi表示rank=1的PMI为i的预编码码字,w1表示rank=1的PMI码本,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000035
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000036
的共轭转置矩阵,Qmod(m,L)表示L个测量子帧中的测量子帧序号为m的第一导频加权矩阵,δ表示约束门限值;
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000034
Wherein, W i represents a precoding codeword with a P=1 of rank=1, and w 1 represents a PMI codebook of rank=1,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000035
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000036
a conjugate transposed matrix, Qmod(m, L) represents a first pilot weighting matrix in which the measurement subframe number of the L measurement subframes is m, and δ represents a constraint threshold value;
网络设备将满足该第七公式的第一导频加权矩阵确定为该第二导频加权矩阵。The network device determines the first pilot weighting matrix satisfying the seventh formula as the second pilot weighting matrix.
可见,若该第一导频加权矩阵为预设的导频加权矩阵,且当被调度的为单用户,网络设备先获取该一个UE的目标权值矩阵,并根据该第一导频加权矩阵和该一个UE的目标权值矩阵确定该目标导频加权矩阵,具体的确定方式如第七公式,其中,该方式用于测量子帧下确定的目标导频加权矩阵,其中,该目标导频加权矩阵用于对下一次的导频信号作加权发送,从而有效提高下行信 道的精度。It can be seen that, if the first pilot weight matrix is a preset pilot weight matrix, and when scheduled as a single user, the network device first acquires a target weight matrix of the UE, and according to the first pilot weight matrix Determining the target pilot weight matrix with the target weight matrix of the one UE, and the specific determining manner is the seventh formula, where the method is used to measure the target pilot weight matrix determined under the subframe, where the target pilot The weighting matrix is used to weight the next pilot signal to effectively improve the downlink signal. The accuracy of the road.
在一些可能的实现方式中,网络设备还需要确定目标预编码码字,并根据该目标预编码码字和该第二导频加权矩阵对下一次的数据信号加权,以提高下行信道的精度,由于网络设备可能先确定第二导频加权矩阵,并没有确定目标预编码码字,则网络设备根据该第一导频加权矩阵和该目标权值矩阵确定所述第二导频加权矩阵之后,该网络设备利用第八公式确定目标预编码码字,其中,该第八公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, the network device further needs to determine a target precoding codeword, and weight the next data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix to improve accuracy of the downlink channel. After the network device may determine the second pilot weight matrix, and the target precoding codeword is not determined, the network device determines the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix. The network device determines the target precoding codeword by using the eighth formula, wherein the eighth formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000037
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000038
表示目标预编码码字。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000037
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000038
Represents the target precoding codeword.
在一些可能的实现方式中,根据该M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之后,该网络设备将第一加权数据信号发送至所述N个UE,其中,该第一加权数据信号是由网络设备根据该目标预编码码字和该第二导频加权矩阵对第一数据信号加权得到的。In some possible implementations, after determining the second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, the network device sends the first weighted data signal to the N UEs, wherein the first weighted data signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix.
可见,网络设备根据目标预编码码字和该第二导频加权矩阵对第一数据信号加权,从而得到第一加权数据信号,其中,第一数据信号包括控制信息等,并将该第一加权数据信号发送至N个UE,以提高下行信道的精度,也使得MIMO系统下的TM4适用于对MU进行下行传输,有效减少了MU之间的信号干扰。It can be seen that the network device weights the first data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix, thereby obtaining a first weighted data signal, where the first data signal includes control information, etc., and the first weighting The data signal is sent to the N UEs to improve the accuracy of the downlink channel, and the TM4 in the MIMO system is suitable for downlink transmission to the MU, thereby effectively reducing signal interference between the MUs.
本发明第二方面提供一种网络设备,该网络设备被配置实现上述第一方面提供的方法的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现,该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。A second aspect of the present invention provides a network device configured to implement the functions of the method provided by the first aspect above. The function may be implemented by hardware or by executing corresponding software implemented by hardware, and the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
其中,该网络设备包括:接收模块,第一确定模块,第二确定模块,第三确定模块和发送模块。The network device includes: a receiving module, a first determining module, a second determining module, a third determining module, and a sending module.
接收模块,用于接收N个预编码矩阵指示PMI,其中,N为大于1的整数,该N个PMI是N个用户设备UE根据网络设备发送的第一加权导频信号所确定的,该第一加权导频信号是由该网络设备根据第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权得到的。a receiving module, configured to receive N precoding matrix indication PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, the N PMIs are determined by the N user equipment UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device, where the A weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weighting matrix.
第一确定模块,用于根据该接收模块接收的N个PMI和第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量。 The first determining module is configured to determine N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix received by the receiving module.
第二确定模块,用于从该N个UE中确定M个被调度的UE。And a second determining module, configured to determine M scheduled UEs from the N UEs.
第三确定模块,用于根据该第二确定模块确定的M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵,其中,M为不大于N的整数。a third determining module, configured to determine a second pilot weighting matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs determined by the second determining module, where M is an integer not greater than N .
发送模块,用于将该第三确定模块确定的该第二加权导频信号发送至述N个UE,其中,该第二加权导频信号是由网络设备根据所述第二导频加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权得到的。a sending module, configured to send the second weighted pilot signal determined by the third determining module to the N UEs, where the second weighted pilot signal is determined by the network device according to the second pilot weighting matrix pair The second pilot signal is weighted.
本发明第三方面提供一种网络设备,该网络设备包括处理器、存储器、总线系统以及输入/输出I/O设备,处理器、存储器和I/O设备通过总线系统相连,其中,存储器中存储一个或多个程序,该存储器用于向处理器提供该一个或多个程序包括的操作指令和数据,该处理器执行该存储器中存储的程序用于实现上述第一方面提供的方法中的步骤。A third aspect of the present invention provides a network device including a processor, a memory, a bus system, and an input/output I/O device, wherein the processor, the memory, and the I/O device are connected by a bus system, wherein the memory is stored One or more programs for providing to the processor operational instructions and data included in the one or more programs, the processor executing the program stored in the memory for implementing the steps in the method provided by the first aspect above .
其中,该I/O设备用于接收N个预编码矩阵指示PMI,其中,N为大于1的整数,该N个PMI是N个用户设备UE根据网络设备发送的第一加权导频信号所确定的,该第一加权导频信号是由该网络设备根据第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权得到的。The I/O device is configured to receive N precoding matrix indication PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are determined by the N user equipment UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device. The first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix.
该处理器301用于根据该N个PMI和该第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量。The processor 301 is configured to determine N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix.
该处理器301还用于从该N个UE中确定M个被调度的UE,并根据该M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵,其中,M为不大于N的整数。The processor 301 is further configured to determine M scheduled UEs from the N UEs, and determine a second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, where Where M is an integer not greater than N.
该I/O设备304还用于将第二加权导频信号发送至所述N个UE,其中,该第二加权导频信号是由该网络设备根据该第二导频加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权得到的。The I/O device 304 is further configured to send the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs, where the second weighted pilot signal is used by the network device according to the second pilot weight matrix to the second The frequency signal is weighted.
本发明第四方面提供一种下行传输系统,包括网络设备和N个用户设备UE,其中,N为大于1的整数,该网络设备和该N个UE通信连接;A fourth aspect of the present invention provides a downlink transmission system, including a network device and N user equipment UEs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the network device is in communication connection with the N UEs;
该网络设备为上述第二方面或第二方面任一可选的实现方式所述的网络设备。The network device is the network device described in the foregoing second aspect or any optional implementation manner of the second aspect.
本发明第五方面提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质存储有上述 第一方面或第一方面任一可选的实现方式所述的下行传输的程序。A fifth aspect of the present invention provides a computer storage medium storing the above The program of the downlink transmission described in the first aspect or any alternative implementation of the first aspect.
与现有技术不同的是,网络设备接收N个PMI,该N个PMI是N个UE根据该网络设备发送的第一加权导频信号所确定的,而该第一加权导频信号是该网络设备根据该第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权得到的,当该网络设备对第一导频信号加权后,UE真实所见的并非第一导频信号,也不是通过第一导频信号确定PMI的,而UE真实所见的是第一加权导频信号,是通过该第一加权导频信号作下行信道估计后确定PMI的,从而扩大了PMI的选择范围,由于该N个PMI并不是真实下行信道的量化,而是经过第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权后的下行信道的量化,因此,该网络设备需要做对应的逆变换才能正确还原出真实下行信道,则该网络设备根据该N个PMI和第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量,再从该N个UE中确定M个被调度的UE,然后根据M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵,这样,就可以通过该第二加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权得到第二加权导频信号,并将该第二加权导频信号发送至N个UE,从而减少了下行信道的量化误差,更好地抑制用户间的干扰,提高了下行信道的精度。Different from the prior art, the network device receives N PMIs, where the N PMIs are determined according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device, and the first weighted pilot signals are the network. And the weighting of the first pilot signal by the device according to the first pilot weighting matrix. After the network device weights the first pilot signal, the UE does not see the first pilot signal, nor does it pass the first guide. The frequency signal determines the PMI, and the UE actually sees the first weighted pilot signal, which is determined by the first weighted pilot signal for downlink channel estimation, thereby expanding the PMI selection range, because the N The PMI is not the quantization of the real downlink channel, but the quantization of the downlink channel weighted by the first pilot weight matrix to the first pilot signal. Therefore, the network device needs to perform the corresponding inverse transform to correctly restore the real downlink channel. And determining, by the network device, the N reconstructed channel primary eigenvectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weighting matrix, and determining M scheduled UEs from the N UEs, and then according to the M scheduled UEs. Each of The reconstructed channel main feature vector of the UE determines the second pilot weight matrix, so that the second pilot signal can be weighted by the second weight matrix to obtain the second weighted pilot signal, and the second weighted pilot signal is obtained. The method is sent to N UEs, thereby reducing the quantization error of the downlink channel, better suppressing interference between users, and improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
附图说明DRAWINGS
为了更清楚地说明本发明实施例中的技术方案,下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,下面描述中的附图仅仅是本发明的一些实施例,对于本领域技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention, the drawings used in the description of the embodiments will be briefly described below. It is obvious that the drawings in the following description are only some embodiments of the present invention. Other drawings can also be obtained from those skilled in the art based on these drawings without paying any creative effort.
图1为现有技术中下行传输的一个实施例示意图;1 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of downlink transmission in the prior art;
图2为本发明实施例中MIMO系统的一个网络架构图;2 is a network architecture diagram of a MIMO system according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图3为本发明实施例中网络设备的一个结构示意图;3 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图4为本发明实施例中下行传输方法的一个实施例示意图;4 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a downlink transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图5为本发明实施例中下行传输方法的一个应用场景实施例示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a downlink transmission method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图6为本发明实施例中下行传输方法的另一个应用场景实施例示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario of a downlink transmission method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图7为本发明实施例中网络设备的另一个结构示意图;FIG. 7 is another schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图8为本发明实施例中网络设备的另一个结构示意图。FIG. 8 is another schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
具体实施方式 Detailed ways
下面将结合本发明实施例中的附图,对本发明实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述,显然,所描述的实施例仅仅是本发明一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本发明中的实施例,本领域技术人员在没有作出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本发明保护的范围。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention are clearly and completely described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention. It is obvious that the described embodiments are only a part of the embodiments of the present invention, but not all embodiments. All other embodiments obtained by a person skilled in the art based on the embodiments of the present invention without creative efforts are within the scope of the present invention.
本发明的说明书和权利要求书及上述附图中的术语“第一”、“第二”、“第三”、“第四”等(如果存在)是用于区别类似的对象,而不必用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。应该理解这样使用的数据在适当情况下可以互换,以便这里描述的实施例能够以除了在这里图示或描述的内容以外的顺序实施。此外,术语“包括”和“具有”以及他们的任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含,例如,包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、系统、产品或设备不必限于清楚地列出的那些步骤或单元,而是可包括没有清楚地列出的或对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或单元。The terms "first", "second", "third", "fourth", etc. (if present) in the specification and claims of the present invention and the above figures are used to distinguish similar objects without having to use To describe a specific order or order. It is to be understood that the data so used may be interchanged where appropriate so that the embodiments described herein can be implemented in a sequence other than what is illustrated or described herein. In addition, the terms "comprises" and "comprises" and "the" and "the" are intended to cover a non-exclusive inclusion, for example, a process, method, system, product, or device that comprises a series of steps or units is not necessarily limited to Those steps or units may include other steps or units not explicitly listed or inherent to such processes, methods, products or devices.
在介绍本发明实施例之前,先介绍本发明实施例中可能涉及的术语:Before introducing the embodiments of the present invention, the terms that may be involved in the embodiments of the present invention are first introduced:
术语“预编码码本”:在长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)协议中设置的用于量化MIMO信道的矩阵或向量,其中,该预编码码本表示为
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000039
每个预编码码本中包括多个预编码矩阵,其中,预编码矩阵表示为
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000040
B表示预编码码本大小,矩阵的行数NT表示网络设备的天线数,列数r表示预编码矩阵的秩,i表示预编码码本中各码字W的索引。
The term "precoding codebook": a matrix or vector for quantizing a MIMO channel set in a long term evolution (LTE) protocol, wherein the precoding codebook is represented as
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000039
Each precoding codebook includes a plurality of precoding matrices, wherein the precoding matrix is represented as
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000040
B denotes a precoding codebook size, the number of rows N T of the matrix represents the number of antennas of the network device, the column number r represents the rank of the precoding matrix, and i represents the index of each codeword W in the precoding codebook.
术语“rank”:为基于预编码码本w的秩。秩为1时每个PMI码字都是一个NT维复数列向量,rank为2时每个码字都是一个NT×2的复矩阵。rank可以由UE根据网络设备发送的下行信令确定,也可以由UE根据当前信道自行选择,UE在反馈PMI同时反馈其采用的rank。The term "rank": is the rank based on the precoding codebook w. When the rank is 1, each PMI codeword is an N T -dimensional complex sequence vector. When the rank is 2, each codeword is a complex matrix of N T ×2. The rank may be determined by the UE according to the downlink signaling sent by the network device, or may be selected by the UE according to the current channel, and the UE feeds back the rank adopted by the UE while feeding back the PMI.
术语“导频加权矩阵”:用于对多天线的导频信号加权的矩阵,是NT维 酉矩阵。The term "pilot weighting matrix": a pilot signal matrix for weighting multiple antennas is N T unitary matrix of dimension.
术语“CSI”:为准确的瞬时信道状态信息,对于MIMO信道而言,包括信道系数矩阵、信道相关矩阵、信道特征向量等,UE反馈的CSI包括PMI、信道质量指示(channel quality indicator,CQI)。The term "CSI": is accurate instantaneous channel state information. For a MIMO channel, including a channel coefficient matrix, a channel correlation matrix, a channel feature vector, etc., the CSI fed back by the UE includes a PMI, a channel quality indicator (CQI). .
术语“信道主特征向量”:将信道系数矩阵作奇异值分解(singular value decomposition,SVD),其最大奇异值对应的右奇异向量为信道的主特征向量。The term "channel main feature vector": The channel coefficient matrix is singular value decomposition (SVD), and the right singular vector corresponding to the largest singular value is the main eigenvector of the channel.
术语“测量子帧”:网络设备在每个子帧内都发送CRS,UE在每个子帧内都对CRS作下行信道估计,下行信道估计结果用于该子帧的数据信道解调,但是,UE只在部分子帧内将下行信道估计结果用于计算CSI,这些子帧为测量子帧。那些下行信道估计结果仅用作解调的子帧称为非测量子帧,测量子帧是网络设备根据LTE协议配置的,并通过信令告知其服务的所有UE。The term "measurement subframe": the network device transmits a CRS in each subframe, the UE performs downlink channel estimation on the CRS in each subframe, and the downlink channel estimation result is used for data channel demodulation of the subframe, but the UE The downlink channel estimation result is used to calculate CSI only in a partial subframe, and these subframes are measurement subframes. The subframes whose downlink channel estimation results are only used for demodulation are referred to as non-measurement subframes, and the measurement subframes are configured by the network device according to the LTE protocol, and all UEs served by the UE are notified by signaling.
应理解,本发明实施例的技术方案可以应用于MIMO系统中,其中,MIMO技术是指在发射端使用多个发射天线,在接收端使用多个接收天线,信号通过在发射端的多天线发送,在接收端的多天线接收,从而有效提高了信号的传输效率。如图2所示,在该MIMO系统框架下,包括:网络设备和用户设备,该网络设备通过下行传输的方式向用户设备发送数据,该用户设备通过上行传输的方式向网络设备发送数据。It should be understood that the technical solution of the embodiments of the present invention may be applied to a MIMO system, where the MIMO technology refers to using multiple transmit antennas at the transmitting end, using multiple receiving antennas at the receiving end, and transmitting signals through multiple antennas at the transmitting end. Multi-antenna reception at the receiving end, thereby effectively improving the signal transmission efficiency. As shown in FIG. 2, in the framework of the MIMO system, the network device includes: a network device and a user equipment, where the network device sends data to the user equipment by means of downlink transmission, and the user equipment sends data to the network device by means of uplink transmission.
用户设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)与一个或多个核心网进行通信,用户设备可以指(user equipment,UE)、接入用户设备、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程用户设备、移动设备、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。接入用户设备可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,未来5G网络中的用户设备等。The user equipment can communicate with one or more core networks via a radio access network (RAN), and the user equipment can refer to (user equipment, UE), access user equipment, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, Mobile station, remote station, remote user equipment, mobile device, wireless communication device, user agent or user device. The access user equipment may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), and a wireless device. A communication-enabled handheld device, a computing device, or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, a user device in a future 5G network, and the like.
网络设备可以是用于与用户设备进行通信的设备,例如:可以是GSM系统或CDMA中的网络设备(base transceiver station,BTS),也可以是WCDMA系统中的网络设备(nodeB,NB),还可以是LTE系统中的演进型网络设备 (evolutional node B,eNB或eNodeB),或者该网络设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的网络侧设备或未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备等。The network device may be a device for communicating with the user equipment, for example, may be a GSM system or a base transceiver station (BTS) in CDMA, or may be a network device (nodeB, NB) in a WCDMA system. Can be an evolved network device in an LTE system (evolutional node B, eNB or eNodeB), or the network device may be a relay station, an access point, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, and a network side device in a future 5G network or a network device in a future evolved PLMN network.
下面介绍一下本发明实施例中网络设备的结构,如图3所示,该网络设备300包括:处理器301、存储器302、总线系统303以及输入/输出(input/output,I/O)设备304,所述处理器301、所述存储器302和所述I/O设备304通过所述总线系统303相连,其中,所述存储器302中存储一个或多个程序,所述存储器302用于向处理器301提供所述一个或多个程序包括的操作指令和数据;The following describes the structure of the network device in the embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 3, the network device 300 includes a processor 301, a memory 302, a bus system 303, and an input/output (I/O) device 304. The processor 301, the memory 302, and the I/O device 304 are connected by the bus system 303, wherein the memory 302 stores one or more programs, and the memory 302 is used to the processor. 301 providing operation instructions and data included in the one or more programs;
该I/O设备304用于接收N个预编码矩阵指示PMI,其中,N为大于1的整数,该N个PMI是N个用户设备UE根据网络设备发送的第一加权导频信号所确定的,该第一加权导频信号是由该网络设备根据第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权得到的;The I/O device 304 is configured to receive N precoding matrix indication PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are determined by the N user equipment UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device. The first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix;
该处理器301用于根据该N个PMI和该第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量;The processor 301 is configured to determine N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix;
该处理器301还用于从该N个UE中确定M个被调度的UE,并根据该M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵,其中,M为不大于N的整数;The processor 301 is further configured to determine M scheduled UEs from the N UEs, and determine a second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, where Where M is an integer not greater than N;
该I/O设备304还用于将第二加权导频信号发送至所述N个UE,其中,该第二加权导频信号是由该网络设备根据该第二导频加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权得到的。The I/O device 304 is further configured to send the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs, where the second weighted pilot signal is used by the network device according to the second pilot weight matrix to the second The frequency signal is weighted.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个。In some possible implementations, the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该处理器301具体用于根据该N个PMI确定该N个PMI对应的预编码码字;确定该N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及该第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵;根据该N个PMI对应的预编码码字,该第一导频加权矩阵,该N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及该第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵确定该N个重构信道主特征向量。In some possible implementations, the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine, according to the N PMIs, precoding codewords corresponding to the N PMIs, determine a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the first a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to a pilot weighting matrix; the first pilot weight matrix, the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the first according to the precoding codewords corresponding to the N PMIs A conjugate transpose matrix corresponding to a pilot weight matrix determines the N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该处理器301具体用于根据该N个PMI对应的预编码码字,该第一导频加权矩阵,该N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩 阵以及该第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵利用第一公式确定该N个重构信道主特征向量,其中,所述第一公式表示为:In some possible implementations, the processor 301 is specifically configured to: according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the N PMIs, the first pilot weight matrix, and the conjugate transpose moment corresponding to the N precoding codewords And the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weighting matrix determines the N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors by using a first formula, wherein the first formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000041
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000042
表示子帧t上确定的用户设备u的重构信道主特征向量,PrimEigVec表示求取矩阵的主特征向量,L表示预设长度内测量子帧的总个数,m是测量子帧序号,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000043
表示测量子帧为sm的第一导频加权矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000044
表示用户设备u对测量子帧sm的第一导频信号作信道估计后选择的PMI,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000045
表示PMI为
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000046
对应的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000047
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000048
对应的共轭转置矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000049
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000050
对应的共轭转置矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000041
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000042
Representing the reconstructed channel main feature vector of the user equipment u determined on the subframe t, PrimEigVec represents the main feature vector of the matrix, L represents the total number of measurement subframes within the preset length, and m is the measurement subframe number.
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000043
Representing a first pilot weighting matrix in which the measurement subframe is s m ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000044
Determining a PMI selected by the user equipment u after channel estimation of the first pilot signal of the measurement subframe s m ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000045
Indicates that the PMI is
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000046
Corresponding precoding codeword,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000047
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000048
Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000049
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000050
Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix.
在实际应用中,处理器301可以在确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,先确定备选导频加权矩阵集,并从该备选导频加权矩阵集中选取该第二导频加权矩阵,并根据该第二导频加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权得到第二加权导频信号,并将该第二加权导频信号发送至N个UE,以提高下行信道的精度,其中,第二导频信号为第一导频信号加权发送后的下一次的用于加权的导频信号。在实际应用中,确定备选导频加权矩阵集的方式有很多种,下面介绍可能的几种方式:In an actual application, the processor 301 may determine the candidate pilot weight matrix set before determining the second pilot weight matrix, and select the second pilot weight matrix from the candidate pilot weight matrix set, and according to The second pilot weighting matrix weights the second pilot signal to obtain a second weighted pilot signal, and sends the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs to improve the accuracy of the downlink channel, where the second pilot The signal is weighted by the first pilot signal for the next transmitted pilot signal for weighting. In practical applications, there are many ways to determine the set of alternative pilot weighting matrices. The following are some possible ways:
在一些可能的实现方式中,处理器301还用于若该第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵,在根据该M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,若M为1,根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和该一个UE对应的预编码码字确定该备选导频加权矩阵集。In some possible implementations, the processor 301 is further configured to determine, according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, if the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix Before the two pilot weighting matrix, if M is 1, the candidate pilot weighting matrix set is determined according to the reconstructed channel primary eigenvector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE.
在一些可能的实现方式中,处理器301具体用于根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和该一个UE对应的预编码码字利用第二公式确定该备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,该第二公式表示为:In some possible implementations, the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine, by using a second formula, the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to a reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to one UE and a precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE, where , the second formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000051
其中,Wi∈w1
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000052
表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示秩rank=1的PMI为i的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000053
表示一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量,w1表示rank=1的PMI码本。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000051
Among them, W i ∈w 1 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000052
Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword of rank rank=1 with a PMI of i,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000053
Represents a reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to one UE, and w 1 represents a PMI codebook with rank=1.
可见,若被调度的为单用户,且该第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵,则 处理器301直接根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和一个UE对应的预编码码字确定该备选导频加权矩阵集,具体确定的方式如第二公式,计算量小。It can be seen that if the single pilot is scheduled, and the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, then The processor 301 directly determines the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to one UE, and the specific determining manner is as follows, and the calculation amount is small.
在一些可能的实现方式中,处理器301还用于若该第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,在根据该M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,若M为2,根据两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量确定目标权值矩阵;当该两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量的相关性小于第一预设阈值时,根据该两个UE对应的预编码码字和该目标权值矩阵确定该备选导频加权矩阵集。In some possible implementations, the processor 301 is further configured to: if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, according to the M scheduled UEs Before the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each UE determines the second pilot weight matrix, if M is 2, the target weight matrix is determined according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the two UEs; when the two UEs respectively correspond When the correlation of the reconstructed channel main feature vector is less than the first preset threshold, the candidate pilot weight matrix set is determined according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix.
在一些可能的实现方式中,处理器301具体用于根据两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量利用第三公式确定该目标权值矩阵,其中,该第三公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine, according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the two UEs, the target weight matrix by using a third formula, where the third formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000054
,其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000055
表示目标权值矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000056
表示u1对应的重构信道主特征向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000057
表示u2对应的重构信道主特征向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000058
表示u1对应的权值向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000059
表示u2对应的权值向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000060
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000061
的共轭转置矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000062
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000063
的共轭转置矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000064
表示对角阵,用于使得
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000065
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000066
的模平方都为1/2。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000054
,among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000055
Represents the target weight matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000056
Representing the reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to u 1 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000057
Representing the reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to u 2 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000058
Represents the weight vector corresponding to u 1 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000059
Represents the weight vector corresponding to u 2 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000060
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000061
Conjugate transposed matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000062
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000063
Conjugate transposed matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000064
Representing a diagonal array, used to make
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000065
with
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000066
The square of the modulus is 1/2.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述处理器301具体用于根据该两个UE对应的预编码码字和该目标权值矩阵利用第四公式确定该备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,该第四公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine, according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix, the candidate pilot weighting matrix set by using a fourth formula, where The fourth formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000067
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000068
表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示rank=2的PMI为i的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000069
表示目标权 值矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000067
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000068
Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword of rank=2 with a PMI of i,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000069
Represents the target weight matrix.
可见,若被调度的为两个用户,且该第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,处理器301首先确定该两个UE对应的目标权值矩阵,确定目标权值矩阵的方式如第三公式。当两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量的相关性小于第一预设阈值时,才根据该目标权值矩阵和两个UE分别对应的预编码码字确定该备选导频加权矩阵集,具体确定的方式如第四公式。It can be seen that if two users are scheduled, and the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, the processor 301 first determines target weights corresponding to the two UEs. Matrix, the way to determine the target weight matrix is as in the third formula. When the correlation between the reconstructed channel main feature vectors corresponding to the two UEs is less than the first preset threshold, the candidate pilot weight matrix is determined according to the target weight matrix and the precoding codewords corresponding to the two UEs respectively. Set, the specific method of determination is the fourth formula.
在一些可能的实现方式中,处理器301还用于若该第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,在根据该M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,若M大于或等于2,根据至少两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量确定目标权值矩阵;当任意两个UE对应的目标权值矩阵的相关性小于第二预设阈值时,根据该至少两个UE对应的预编码码字和该目标权值矩阵确定该备选导频加权矩阵集。In some possible implementations, the processor 301 is further configured to: if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, according to the M scheduled UEs Before the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each UE determines the second pilot weight matrix, if M is greater than or equal to 2, the target weight matrix is determined according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the at least two UEs respectively; When the correlation of the target weight matrix corresponding to the UE is less than the second preset threshold, the candidate pilot weight matrix set is determined according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix.
在一些可能的实现方式中,处理器301具体用于根据该至少两个UE对应的预编码码字和该目标权值矩阵利用第五公式确定该备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,该第五公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine, according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix, the candidate pilot weighting matrix set by using a fifth formula, where the The five formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000070
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000071
表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示rank≥2的PMI为i的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000072
表示目标权值矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000070
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000071
Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword with a rank ≥ 2 and a PMI of i,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000072
Represents the target weight matrix.
可见,当被调度的为至少两个用户时,处理器301首先确定该至少两个UE对应的目标权值矩阵,确定目标权值矩阵的方式如第三公式。当至少两个UE中的任意两个UE分别对应的目标权值矩阵的相关性小于第二预设阈值时,才根据该目标权值矩阵和至少两个UE对应的预编码码字确定备选导频加权矩阵集,具体确定的方式如第五公式。It can be seen that when the at least two users are scheduled, the processor 301 first determines a target weight matrix corresponding to the at least two UEs, and the manner of determining the target weight matrix is as follows. When the correlation of the target weight matrix corresponding to any two of the at least two UEs is less than the second preset threshold, determining the candidate according to the target weight matrix and the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs The set of pilot weighting matrices is determined in a manner such as the fifth formula.
当网络设备确定备选导频加权矩阵集之后,则从该备选导频加权矩阵集确定第二导频加权矩阵,在实际应用中,确定第二导频加权矩阵的方式有很多种,下面介绍可能的几种方式:After the network device determines the candidate pilot weight matrix set, the second pilot weight matrix is determined from the candidate pilot weight matrix set. In practical applications, there are many ways to determine the second pilot weight matrix. Introduce possible ways:
在一些可能的实现方式中,若该第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设 的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,处理器301具体用于随机选取目标预编码码字,并根据该目标预编码矩阵从所述备选导频加权矩阵集中选取该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵;将该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵确定为该第二导频加权矩阵。In some possible implementations, if the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix and a preset At least one of the pilot weighting matrix, the processor 301 is specifically configured to randomly select a target precoding codeword, and select, according to the target precoding matrix, the target precoding codeword corresponding to the target pilot precoding matrix An alternative pilot weighting matrix; the candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
可见,当第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个时,处理器301随机选取任意一个UE对应的预编码码字作为该目标预编码码字,并将目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵作为该第二导频加权矩阵,其中,该方式用于非测量子帧下确定的第二导频加权矩阵,该第二导频加权矩阵用于对下一次的导频信号作加权发送,例如:根据该第二导频加权矩阵对第二导频信号(第一导频信号作下行加权发送后的下一次进行下行加权的导频信号)加权得到第二加权导频信号,并将该第二加权导频信号发送至N个UE,从而提高下行信道的精度。It can be seen that when the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, the processor 301 randomly selects a precoding codeword corresponding to any one of the UEs as the target precoding codeword, and The candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword is used as the second pilot weighting matrix, where the mode is used for the second pilot weighting matrix determined under the non-measurement subframe, and the second pilot weighting matrix For performing weighted transmission on the next pilot signal, for example, according to the second pilot weight matrix, the second pilot signal (the first pilot signal is downlink weighted for the next downlink weighted pilot signal) And weighting the second weighted pilot signal, and transmitting the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs, thereby improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
在一些可能的实现方式中,若该第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵,处理器301具体用于按照预设规则确定目标预编码码字,并根据该目标预编码矩阵从该备选导频加权矩阵集中选取该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵;将该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵确定为该第二导频加权矩阵。In some possible implementations, if the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine a target precoding codeword according to a preset rule, and according to the target precoding matrix, the candidate guide The candidate weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword is selected in the frequency weighting matrix; the candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
在一些可能的实现方式中,处理器301具体用于利用第六公式确定该目标预编码码字,其中,该第六公式表示为:In some possible implementations, the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine the target pre-coded codeword by using a sixth formula, where the sixth formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000073
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000074
表示目标预编码码字,n表示测量子帧sm之前的测量子帧的序号,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000075
表示测量子帧为sm对应的备选导频加权矩阵。对应地,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000076
作为第二导频加权矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000073
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000074
Indicates the target precoding codeword, and n denotes the sequence number of the measurement subframe before the measurement subframe s m ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000075
Indicates that the measurement subframe is an alternate pilot weight matrix corresponding to s m . Correspondingly,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000076
As the second pilot weighting matrix.
可见,若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵,处理器301按照第六公式从N个UE对应的预编码码字中确定目标预编码码字,并将该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵作为该第二导频加权矩阵,其中,该方式用于测量子帧下确定的第二导频加权矩阵,该第二导频加权矩阵用于对下一次的导频信号作加权发送,该第二导频加权矩阵和该目标预编码码字用于对下一次的数据信号 作加权发送,从而有效提高下行信道的精度。It can be seen that if the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, the processor 301 determines the target precoding codeword from the precoding codewords corresponding to the N UEs according to the sixth formula, and prepares the target precoding codewords. Selecting a pilot weighting matrix as the second pilot weighting matrix, wherein the method is used to measure a second pilot weighting matrix determined under a subframe, and the second pilot weighting matrix is used for the next pilot signal Weighted transmission, the second pilot weight matrix and the target precoding codeword are used for the next data signal Weighted transmission, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
在实际应用中,还可以根据第一导频加权矩阵确定第二导频加权矩阵,下面介绍可能的几种方式:In an actual application, the second pilot weight matrix may also be determined according to the first pilot weight matrix, and the following may be introduced in several ways:
在一些可能的实现方式中,若该第一导频加权矩阵为预设的导频加权矩阵,处理器301具体用于若M为1,获取一个UE的目标权值矩阵;根据该第一导频加权矩阵和该一个UE的目标权值矩阵确定该第二导频加权矩阵。In some possible implementations, if the first pilot weight matrix is a preset pilot weight matrix, the processor 301 is specifically configured to acquire a target weight matrix of a UE if M is 1, according to the first guide. The second weighting matrix is determined by a frequency weighting matrix and a target weight matrix of the one UE.
在一些可能的实现方式中,处理器301具体用于判断该第一导频加权矩阵和该目标权值矩阵是否满足第七公式,其中,该第七公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, the processor 301 is specifically configured to determine whether the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix satisfy the seventh formula, where the seventh formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000077
其中,Wi表示rank=1的PMI为i的预编码码字,w1表示rank=1的PMI码本,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000078
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000079
的共轭转置矩阵,Qmod(m,L)表示L个测量子帧中的测量子帧序号为m的第一导频加权矩阵,δ表示约束门限值;将满足该第七公式的第一导频加权矩阵确定为该述第二导频加权矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000077
Wherein, W i represents a precoding codeword with a P=1 of rank=1, and w 1 represents a PMI codebook of rank=1,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000078
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000079
The conjugate transposed matrix, Qmod(m, L) represents the first pilot weighting matrix of the measurement subframe number in the L measurement subframes, m, and δ represents the constraint threshold; the first formula will be satisfied A pilot weighting matrix is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
可见,若该第一导频加权矩阵为所述预设的导频加权矩阵,且若被调度的为单用户,则处理器301先获取该一个UE的目标权值矩阵,并根据该第一导频加权矩阵和该一个UE的目标权值矩阵确定该第二导频加权矩阵,具体的确定方式如第七公式,其中,该方式用于测量子帧下确定的第二导频加权矩阵,其中,该第二导频加权矩阵用于对下一次的导频信号作加权发送,从而有效提高下行信道的精度。It can be seen that if the first pilot weight matrix is the preset pilot weight matrix, and if it is scheduled as a single user, the processor 301 first acquires a target weight matrix of the UE, and according to the first The pilot weighting matrix and the target weight matrix of the one UE determine the second pilot weight matrix, and the specific determining manner is the seventh formula, where the method is used to measure the second pilot weighting matrix determined under the subframe. The second pilot weight matrix is used for weighted transmission of the next pilot signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
在一些可能的实现方式中,处理器301还用于根据该第一导频加权矩阵和该目标权值矩阵确定该第二导频加权矩阵之后,利用第八公式确定目标预编码码字,其中,该第八公式表示为:In some possible implementations, after the processor 301 is further configured to determine the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix, determine a target precoding codeword by using an eighth formula, where The eighth formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000080
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000081
表示目标预编码码字。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000080
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000081
Represents the target precoding codeword.
在一些可能的实现方式中,处理器301还用于根据该M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之后,将第一加权数据信号发送至该N个UE,其中,该第一加权数据信号是由网络设备根据目标预编码码字和第二导频加权矩阵对第一数据信号加权得到的。 In some possible implementations, the processor 301 is further configured to: after determining the second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, send the first weighted data signal Up to the N UEs, wherein the first weighted data signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weighting matrix.
可见,若该第一导频加权矩阵为所述预设的导频加权矩阵,在处理器301先确定第二导频加权矩阵后,并根据第八公式确定目标预编码码字,其中,该第二导频加权矩阵和该目标预编码码字用于对下一次的数据信号作加权发送,从而有效提高下行信道的精度。It can be seen that, if the first pilot weight matrix is the preset pilot weight matrix, after the processor 301 first determines the second pilot weight matrix, and determining the target precoding codeword according to the eighth formula, where The second pilot weight matrix and the target precoding codeword are used for weighted transmission of the next data signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
与现有技术不同的是,I/O设备304接收N个PMI,其中,N为大于1的整数,该N个PMI是N个UE根据I/O设备304发送的第一加权导频信号所确定的,而该第一加权导频信号是处理器301根据第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权得到的,当处理器301对第一导频信号加权后,UE真实所见的并非是第一导频信号,也不是通过第一导频信号确定PMI的,而UE真实所见的是第一加权导频信号,是通过该第一加权导频信号作下行信道估计后确定PMI的,从而扩大了PMI的选择范围,由于N个PMI并不是真实下行信道的量化,而是经过第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权后的下行信道的量化,因此,处理器301需要做对应的逆变换才能正确还原真实下行信道,则处理器301根据该N个PMI和第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量,再从该N个UE中确定M个被调度的UE,然后根据M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵,这样,就可以通过该第二加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权得到第二加权导频信号,并通过I/O设备304将该第二加权导频信号发送至N个UE,从而减少了下行信道的量化误差,更好地抑制用户间的干扰,提高下行信道的精度。Different from the prior art, the I/O device 304 receives N PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are the first weighted pilot signals transmitted by the N UEs according to the I/O device 304. Determining, the first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the processor 301 weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix, and after the processor 301 weights the first pilot signal, the UE actually sees It is not the first pilot signal, nor the PMI is determined by the first pilot signal, and the UE actually sees the first weighted pilot signal, and the PMI is determined by using the first weighted pilot signal for downlink channel estimation. Therefore, the selection range of the PMI is expanded, because the N PMIs are not the quantization of the real downlink channel, but the quantization of the downlink channel weighted by the first pilot weight matrix by the first pilot weight matrix, therefore, the processor 301 The corresponding inverse transform is required to correctly restore the real downlink channel, and the processor 301 determines N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix, and then determines M of the N UEs from the N UEs. The scheduled UE is then based on the M scheduled UEs The reconstructed channel main feature vector of each UE determines a second pilot weight matrix, so that the second pilot signal can be weighted by the second weight matrix to obtain a second weighted pilot signal and passed through the I/O device. The second weighted pilot signal is sent to the N UEs, thereby reducing the quantization error of the downlink channel, better suppressing interference between users, and improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
在本发明实施例中,处理器301还可以称为中央处理单元(Central Processing Unit,CPU)。存储器302可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器,并向处理器301提供指令和数据。存储器302的一部分还可以包括非易失性随机存取存储器(NVRAM)。具体的应用中网络设备300的各个组件通过总线系统303耦合在一起,其中总线系统303除包括数据总线之外,还可以包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线等。但是为了清楚说明起见,在图3中将各种总线都标为总线系统303。In the embodiment of the present invention, the processor 301 may also be referred to as a central processing unit (CPU). Memory 302 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to processor 301. A portion of the memory 302 may also include non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM). The specific components of the network device 300 are coupled together by a bus system 303 in a specific application. The bus system 303 may include a power bus, a control bus, a status signal bus, and the like in addition to the data bus. However, for clarity of description, various buses are labeled as bus system 303 in FIG.
上述本发明实施例揭示的方法可以应用于处理器301中,或者由处理器301实现。处理器301可能是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器301中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软 件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器301可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本发明实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本发明实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器302,处理器301读取存储器302中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。The method disclosed in the foregoing embodiments of the present invention may be applied to the processor 301 or implemented by the processor 301. Processor 301 may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, each step of the above method may pass through the integrated logic circuit of the hardware in the processor 301 or soft. The instructions in the form of pieces are completed. The processor 301 described above may be a general purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), an off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or discrete hardware. Component. The methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be implemented or carried out. The general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented by the hardware decoding processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like. The storage medium is located in the memory 302, and the processor 301 reads the information in the memory 302 and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
请参阅图4,本发明实施例中下行传输方法的一个实施例示意图,该下行传输方法应用于MIMO系统,具体流程如下:FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a downlink transmission method according to an embodiment of the present invention. The downlink transmission method is applied to a MIMO system, and the specific process is as follows:
步骤401、网络设备确定用于下行信道估计的第一导频信号。Step 401: The network device determines a first pilot signal used for downlink channel estimation.
本发明实施例中,该第一导频信号用于UE对下行信道作信道估计,因此,网络设备先确定第一导频信号,通常,该第一导频信号为单一频率,网络设备随机性地选取部分通信信号作为该第一导频信号或者根据预设规则确定该第一导频信号,例如:网络设备侧有专门用于下行信道估计的导频信号。In the embodiment of the present invention, the first pilot signal is used by the UE to perform channel estimation on the downlink channel. Therefore, the network device first determines the first pilot signal. Generally, the first pilot signal is a single frequency, and the network device is random. Selecting a part of the communication signal as the first pilot signal or determining the first pilot signal according to a preset rule, for example, the network device side has a pilot signal dedicated for downlink channel estimation.
步骤402、网络设备根据该第一导频信号确定第一导频加权矩阵。Step 402: The network device determines a first pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot signal.
与现有技术不同的是,网络设备没有直接将第一导频信号发送给UE,而是先根据该第一导频信号确定第一导频加权矩阵,其中,该第一导频加权矩阵为前驱导频加权矩阵,用于对第一导频信号加权。在实际应用中,该第一导频加权矩阵可以是单位矩阵,也可以是针对该第一导频信号提前设置的酉矩阵,由于现有技术中没有使用导频加权矩阵对导频信号加权,因此初次对导频信号加权时使用的第一导频加权矩阵可以为单位矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,当通过第一次使用第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权后,确定下一次的导频加权矩阵,作为对下一次的导频信号的加权,此处不做具体限定。Different from the prior art, the network device does not directly send the first pilot signal to the UE, but first determines a first pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot signal, where the first pilot weight matrix is A precursor pilot weighting matrix for weighting the first pilot signal. In an actual application, the first pilot weight matrix may be an identity matrix, or may be a unitary matrix set in advance for the first pilot signal. Since the pilot weighting matrix is not used in the prior art to weight the pilot signal, Therefore, the first pilot weighting matrix used for weighting the pilot signal for the first time may be at least one of an identity matrix and a preset pilot weighting matrix, when the first pilot is used by using the first pilot weighting matrix for the first time. After the signal is weighted, the next pilot weight matrix is determined as a weighting of the next pilot signal, which is not specifically limited herein.
步骤403、网络设备根据该第一导频加权矩阵对该第一导频信号加权得到第一加权导频信号,并将该第一加权导频信号发送至N个UE。Step 403: The network device weights the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix to obtain a first weighted pilot signal, and sends the first weighted pilot signal to the N UEs.
其中,该第一加权导频信号用于该N个UE作下行信道估计,并根据下行 信道估计的结果确定N个PMI,然后将确定的该N个PMI发送给网络设备,其中,N为大于1的整数。The first weighted pilot signal is used by the N UEs for downlink channel estimation, and according to the downlink. The result of the channel estimation determines N PMIs, and then transmits the determined N PMIs to the network device, where N is an integer greater than one.
由于网络设备根据第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权后得到第一加权导频信号,N个UE按照现有的信道估计方法对该第一加权导频信号作信道估计,其效果为UE所见的下行信道被第一导频加权矩阵变换,UE真实所见的并非第一导频信号,也不是通过第一导频信号确定PMI的,而UE真实所见的是第一加权导频信号,是通过该第一加权导频信号作下行信道估计后确定PMI的,从而扩大了PMI的选择范围。The network equipment obtains the first weighted pilot signal by weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix, and the N UEs perform channel estimation on the first weighted pilot signal according to the existing channel estimation method, and the effect thereof is obtained. The downlink channel seen by the UE is transformed by the first pilot weight matrix. What the UE actually sees is not the first pilot signal, nor is the PMI determined by the first pilot signal, and the UE actually sees the first weighting. The pilot signal is determined by the first weighted pilot signal for downlink channel estimation, thereby expanding the PMI selection range.
步骤404、N个UE根据该第一加权导频信号确定N个PMI。Step 404: The N UEs determine N PMIs according to the first weighted pilot signal.
N个UE根据接收该第一加权导频信号作下行信道估计,并根据下行信道估计的结果确定对应的PMI,其中,为了提高PMI的准确度,每个UE根据接收的第一加权导频信号选取下行信道质量最优的预编码码字所对应的PMI。The N UEs perform downlink channel estimation according to the received first weighted pilot signal, and determine a corresponding PMI according to the result of the downlink channel estimation, wherein, in order to improve the accuracy of the PMI, each UE according to the received first weighted pilot signal The PMI corresponding to the precoding codeword with the best downlink channel quality is selected.
步骤405、N个UE将该N个PMI发送给网络设备。Step 405: The N UEs send the N PMIs to the network device.
由于该N个PMI用于网络设备确定N个重构信道主特征向量,则N个UE将各自确定的PMI发送给网络设备。Since the N PMIs are used by the network device to determine N reconstructed channel primary eigenvectors, the N UEs send the respective determined PMIs to the network device.
步骤406、网络设备接收N个UE发送的该N个PMI。Step 406: The network device receives the N PMIs sent by the N UEs.
网路设备接收该N个UE发送的N个PMI,可以先将该N个PMI进行本地缓存,以便后续使用时及时获取该N个PMI。The network device receives the N PMIs sent by the N UEs, and may locally cache the N PMIs, so that the N PMIs are obtained in time for subsequent use.
步骤407、网络设备根据N个PMI和第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量。Step 407: The network device determines N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix.
与现有技术不同的是,由于对第一导频信号加权处理后,N个UE确定的N个PMI并不是真实下行信道的量化,而是经过第一导频加权矩阵变换后的下行信道的量化,因此,在网络设备侧需要做对应的逆变换才能正确还原出真实下行信道,具体的方法就是根据N个UE反馈的N个PMI和第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量。Different from the prior art, after weighting the first pilot signal, the N PMIs determined by the N UEs are not the quantization of the real downlink channel, but the downlink channel after the first pilot weight matrix transformation. Quantization, therefore, the corresponding inverse transformation needs to be performed on the network device side to correctly restore the real downlink channel. The specific method is to determine the main features of the N reconstructed channels according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weighting matrix fed back by the N UEs. vector.
在一些可能的实现方式中,网络设备获取到该N个PMI和第一导频加权矩阵后,根据该N个PMI确定该N个PMI对应的N个预编码码字,然后网络设备确定该N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及该第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵,根据该N个预编码码字,该第一导频加权矩阵,该N 个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及该第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵确定该N个重构信道主特征向量。In some possible implementation manners, after acquiring the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix, the network device determines, according to the N PMIs, N precoding codewords corresponding to the N PMIs, and then the network device determines the N a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the precoding codewords and a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix, the first pilot weight matrix, the N according to the N precoding codewords The conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the precoding codewords and the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix determine the N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors.
由于PMI和预编码码字之间存在对应关系,则网络设备首先根据N个PMI确定对应的N个预编码码字,为保持第一导频信号加权后的导频功率不变,且保持N个PMI码字旋转前后的相关性不变,约束第一导频加权矩阵为酉矩阵,则确定该N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵。The network device first determines corresponding N precoding codewords according to the N PMIs, and the pilot powers that are weighted by the first pilot signal are unchanged, and are kept N, because there is a corresponding relationship between the PMI and the precoding codewords. The correlation between the PMI codewords before and after the rotation is unchanged, and the first pilot weighting matrix is constrained to be a unitary matrix, and the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords and the conjugate corresponding to the first pilot weighting matrix are determined. Transpose matrix.
在实际应用中,网络设备根据N个预编码码字,第一导频加权矩阵,N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量的方式有很多种,其中,下面是其中一种方式:In a practical application, the network device determines, according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix. There are many ways to reconstruct the main feature vector of the channel. Among them, the following is one of the ways:
网络设备根据N个预编码码字,第一导频加权矩阵,N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵利用第一公式确定N个重构信道主特征向量,其中,该第一公式表示为:The network device determines, according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix by using the first formula. Reconstructing the channel main feature vector, wherein the first formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000082
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000083
表示子帧t上确定的用户设备u的重构信道主特征向量,PrimEigVec表示求取矩阵的主特征向量,L表示预设长度内测量子帧的总个数,m是测量子帧序号,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000084
表示测量子帧为sm的第一导频加权矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000085
表示用户设备u对测量子帧sm的第一导频信号作信道估计后选择的PMI,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000086
表示PMI为
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000087
对应的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000088
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000089
对应的共轭转置矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000090
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000091
对应的共轭转置矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000082
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000083
Representing the reconstructed channel main feature vector of the user equipment u determined on the subframe t, PrimEigVec represents the main feature vector of the matrix, L represents the total number of measurement subframes within the preset length, and m is the measurement subframe number.
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000084
Representing a first pilot weighting matrix in which the measurement subframe is s m ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000085
Determining a PMI selected by the user equipment u after channel estimation of the first pilot signal of the measurement subframe s m ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000086
Indicates that the PMI is
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000087
Corresponding precoding codeword,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000088
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000089
Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000090
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000091
Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix.
步骤408、网络设备从N个UE中确定M个被调度的UE。Step 408: The network device determines M scheduled UEs from the N UEs.
其中,M为不大于N的整数。在实际应用中,并非每个UE对应的下行信道的质量都良好,因此,为了提高下行信道的精度,网络设备根据该N个重构信道主特征向量以及N个UE的N个CQI确定被调度的UE,其中,N个UE的CQI在网络设备的本地存储,因此,网络设备可以直接从本地获取该N个UE的CQI。Where M is an integer not greater than N. In practical applications, not the quality of the downlink channel corresponding to each UE is good. Therefore, in order to improve the accuracy of the downlink channel, the network device determines to be scheduled according to the N reconstructed channel primary feature vectors and N CQIs of the N UEs. The UE, wherein the CQIs of the N UEs are stored locally in the network device, therefore, the network device can directly obtain the CQIs of the N UEs locally.
步骤409、网络设备根据该M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道 主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵。Step 409: The network device reconstructs a channel according to each of the M scheduled UEs. The main feature vector determines a second pilot weighting matrix.
在网络设备根据M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,网络设备一般先确定备选导频加权矩阵集,按照预设规则从备选导频加权矩阵集中选取某个备选导频加权矩阵作为该第二导频加权矩阵,其中,确定备选导频加权矩阵集的方式有很多种,下面是可能实现的几种方式:Before the network device determines the second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, the network device generally determines the candidate pilot weight matrix set first, and prepares according to the preset rule. The selected pilot weighting matrix selects an alternative pilot weighting matrix as the second pilot weighting matrix. There are many ways to determine the candidate pilot weighting matrix set. The following are several ways that may be implemented:
在一些可能的实现方式中,若该第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵,若M为1,网络设备根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和该一个UE对应的预编码码字确定备选导频加权矩阵集。In some possible implementation manners, if the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, if M is 1, the network device determines, according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE. A set of alternative pilot weighting matrices.
在实际应用中,网络设备可以根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和该第一UE对应的预编码码字利用第二公式确定该第二导频加权矩阵,其中,该第二公式表示为:In a practical application, the network device may determine the second pilot weight matrix by using a second formula according to a reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to a UE and a precoding codeword corresponding to the first UE, where the second formula represents for:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000092
其中,Wi∈w1
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000093
表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示秩rank=1的PMI为i的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000094
表示一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量,w1表示rank=1的PMI码本。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000092
Among them, W i ∈w 1 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000093
Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword of rank rank=1 with a PMI of i,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000094
Represents a reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to one UE, and w 1 represents a PMI codebook with rank=1.
可见,若被调度的为单用户,且该第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵,则网络设备直接根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和一个UE对应的预编码码字按照第二公式确定该备选导频加权矩阵集,计算量小。It can be seen that, if the single pilot is scheduled to be a single user, and the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, the network device directly according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to one UE according to the second The formula determines the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices with a small amount of computation.
在另一些可能的实现方式中,若该第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,若M为2,网络设备根据两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量确定目标权值矩阵;In another possible implementation manner, if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, if M is 2, the network device respectively reconstructs according to the two UEs. a channel principal feature vector determines a target weight matrix;
当该两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量的相关性小于第一预设阈值时,网络设备根据该两个UE对应的预编码码字和该目标权值矩阵确定该备选导频加权矩阵集。The network device determines the candidate pilot according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix when the correlation between the reconstructed channel main feature vectors of the two UEs is less than a first preset threshold. A set of weighting matrices.
在实际应用中,网络设备可以根据两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量利用第三公式确定该目标权值矩阵,其中,该第三公式表示为: In a practical application, the network device may determine the target weight matrix by using a third formula according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the two UEs, where the third formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000095
,其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000096
表示目标权值矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000097
表示u1对应的重构信道主特征向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000098
表示u2对应的重构信道主特征向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000099
表示u1对应的权值向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000100
表示u2对应的权值向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000101
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000102
的共轭转置矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000103
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000104
的共轭转置矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000105
表示对角阵,用于使得
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000106
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000107
的模平方都为1/2。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000095
,among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000096
Represents the target weight matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000097
Representing the reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to u 1 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000098
Representing the reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to u 2 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000099
Represents the weight vector corresponding to u 1 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000100
Represents the weight vector corresponding to u 2 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000101
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000102
Conjugate transposed matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000103
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000104
Conjugate transposed matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000105
Representing a diagonal array, used to make
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000106
with
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000107
The square of the modulus is 1/2.
网络设备根据该两个UE对应的预编码码字和该目标权值矩阵利用第四公式确定备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,该第四公式表示为:The network device determines, according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix, a candidate pilot weighting matrix set by using a fourth formula, where the fourth formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000108
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000109
表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示rank=2的PMI为i的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000110
表示目标权值矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000108
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000109
Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword of rank=2 with a PMI of i,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000110
Represents the target weight matrix.
可见,若被调度的为两个用户,且若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,网络设备首先确定该两个UE对应的目标权值矩阵,具体的确定方式如第三公式,一般情况下,每个UE对应的目标权值矩阵对应的功率是相同的。然后比较该两个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量的相关性,当两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量的相关性小于第一预设阈值时,两个UE对应的下行信道没有干扰或者干扰较小,其中,该第一预设阈值一般为1,该第一预设阈值可根据实际情况而定,此处不做具体限定,网络设备才根据该目标权值矩阵和两个UE分别对应的预编码码字确定对应的备选导频加权矩阵集,具体的确定方式如第四公式。It can be seen that if two users are scheduled, and if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, the network device first determines a target weight matrix corresponding to the two UEs. The specific determining manner is the third formula. Generally, the power corresponding to the target weight matrix corresponding to each UE is the same. Then, the correlation of the reconstructed channel main feature vectors corresponding to the two UEs is compared. When the correlation between the reconstructed channel main feature vectors of the two UEs is less than the first preset threshold, the downlink channels corresponding to the two UEs are not The interference or the interference is small, wherein the first preset threshold is generally 1. The first preset threshold may be determined according to an actual situation, and is not specifically limited herein, and the network device is based on the target weight matrix and two The precoding codewords corresponding to the UEs respectively determine a corresponding set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, and the specific determining manner is the fourth formula.
在另一些可能的实现方式中,若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,若M大于或等于2,网络设备根据至少两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量确定目标权值矩阵;In another possible implementation, if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, if M is greater than or equal to 2, the network device respectively corresponds to at least two UEs. Reconstructing the channel main feature vector to determine the target weight matrix;
当任意两个UE对应的目标权值矩阵的相关性小于第二预设阈值时,网络 设备根据该至少两个UE对应的预编码码字和该目标权值矩阵确定备选导频加权矩阵集。When the correlation of the target weight matrix corresponding to any two UEs is less than the second preset threshold, the network The device determines an alternative pilot weighting matrix set according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix.
在实际应用中,网络设备可以根据该至少两个UE对应的预编码码字和该目标权值矩阵利用第五公式确定该备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,该第五公式表示为:In a practical application, the network device may determine, according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix, the candidate pilot weighting matrix set by using a fifth formula, where the fifth formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000111
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000112
表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示rank≥2的PMI为i的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000113
表示目标权值矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000111
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000112
Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword with a rank ≥ 2 and a PMI of i,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000113
Represents the target weight matrix.
可见,若被调度的为至少两个用户,且若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,网络设备首先确定该至少两个UE对应的目标权值矩阵,具体的确定方式如第三公式,一般情况下,每个UE对应的目标权值矩阵对应的功率是相同的。当至少两个UE中的任意两个UE分别对应的目标权值矩阵的相关性小于第二预设阈值时,网络设备才根据该目标权值矩阵和至少两个UE对应的预编码码字确定该备选导频加权矩阵集,具体的确定方式如第五公式,在实际应用中,该第二预设阈值是由网络设备根据实际情况而定,例如,该第二预设阈值为1,此处不做具体限定。It can be seen that if at least two users are scheduled, and if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, the network device first determines target rights corresponding to the at least two UEs. The value matrix is determined by the third formula. Generally, the power corresponding to the target weight matrix corresponding to each UE is the same. When the correlation of the target weight matrix corresponding to any two of the at least two UEs is less than the second preset threshold, the network device determines, according to the target weight matrix and the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs. The second set of preset thresholds is determined by the network device according to the actual situation, for example, the second preset threshold is 1, This is not specifically limited.
在本发明实施例中,当确定备选导频加权矩阵集后,可以从该导频加权矩阵集中选取某个备选导频加权矩阵确定为该第二导频加权矩阵,其中,确定第二导频加权矩阵的方式有很多种,下面是可能实现的几种方式:In the embodiment of the present invention, after determining the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, an alternative pilot weighting matrix may be selected from the pilot weighting matrix set to determine the second pilot weighting matrix, wherein the second is determined. There are many ways to use the pilot weighting matrix. Here are a few ways that you might implement:
在一些可能的实现方式中,若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,网络设备先随机选取目标预编码码字,并根据该目标预编码码字从该备选导频加权矩阵集中选取该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵,然后,网络设备将该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵确定为该第二导频加权矩阵。In some possible implementation manners, if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, the network device first randomly selects a target precoding codeword, and according to the target precoding code Selecting, from the candidate pilot weighting matrix, the candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword, and then determining, by the network device, the candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword as the second Pilot weighting matrix.
可见,若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,网络设备从N个UE对应的N个预编码码字中随机选取某个预编码码字作为该目标预编码码字,并根据该目标预编码码字从该备选导频加权矩阵集中选取该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵,然后将目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵作为该第二导频加权矩阵,其中,该方式用于非测量 子帧下确定的第二导频加权矩阵,该第二导频加权矩阵用于对下一次的导频信号作加权发送,从而提高下行信道的精度。It can be seen that, if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, the network device randomly selects a precoding codeword from the N precoding codewords corresponding to the N UEs. Decoding a codeword, and selecting, from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set, an candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword according to the target precoding codeword, and then preparing the target precoding codeword corresponding to the target Selecting a pilot weighting matrix as the second pilot weighting matrix, wherein the mode is used for non-measurement A second pilot weighting matrix determined under the subframe, the second pilot weighting matrix is used for weighted transmission of the next pilot signal, thereby improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
在另一些可能的实现方式中,若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵,网络设备按照预设规则从N个对应的N个预编码码字中选取某个预编码码字确定为目标预编码码字,并根据该目标预编码码字从备选导频加权矩阵集中选取该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵,然后将该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵确定为该第二导频加权矩阵。In other possible implementation manners, if the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, the network device selects a precoding codeword from the N corresponding N precoding codewords according to a preset rule to determine the target pre- Encoding a codeword, and selecting an candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the target precoding codeword, and then selecting the candidate pilot corresponding to the target precoding codeword The weighting matrix is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
在实际应用中,网络设备可以利用第六公式确定该目标预编码码字,其中,该第六公式表示为:In an actual application, the network device may determine the target pre-encoded codeword by using a sixth formula, where the sixth formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000114
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000115
表示目标预编码码字,n表示测量子帧sm之前的测量子帧的序号,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000116
表示测量子帧为sm对应的备选导频加权矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000114
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000115
Indicates the target precoding codeword, and n denotes the sequence number of the measurement subframe before the measurement subframe s m ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000116
Indicates that the measurement subframe is an alternate pilot weight matrix corresponding to s m .
可见,若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵,网络设备按照第六公式确定目标预编码码字,并根据该目标预编码码字从备选导频加权矩阵集中选取该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵作为该第二导频加权矩阵,其中,该方式用于测量子帧下确定的第二导频加权矩阵,该第二导频加权矩阵用于对下一次的导频信号作加权发送,该目第二导频加权矩阵和该目标预编码码字用于对一次的数据信号作加权发送,从而有效提高下行信道的精度。It can be seen that if the first pilot weighting matrix is a unit weighting matrix, the network device determines the target precoding codeword according to the sixth formula, and selects the target precoding codeword from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the target precoding codeword. Corresponding candidate pilot weight matrix is used as the second pilot weight matrix, wherein the mode is used to measure a second pilot weight matrix determined under the subframe, and the second pilot weight matrix is used for the next pilot The frequency signal is weighted and transmitted, and the second pilot weighting matrix and the target precoding codeword are used for weighted transmission of the primary data signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
在实际应用中,网络设备还可以根据该第一导频加权矩阵确定该第二导频加权矩阵,其中,确定该第二导频加权矩阵的方式有很多种,下面是可能实现的几种方式:In a practical application, the network device may further determine the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix, wherein there are many ways to determine the second pilot weight matrix, and the following are possible ways. :
在一些可能的实现方式中,若第一导频加权矩阵为预设的导频加权矩阵,若M为1,网络设备获取一个UE的目标权值矩阵,然后根据该第一导频加权矩阵和该一个UE的目标权值矩阵确定该第二导频加权矩阵。In some possible implementation manners, if the first pilot weight matrix is a preset pilot weight matrix, if M is 1, the network device acquires a target weight matrix of the UE, and then according to the first pilot weight matrix The target weight matrix of the one UE determines the second pilot weight matrix.
在实际应用中,网络设备判断该第一导频加权矩阵和该目标权值矩阵是否满足第七公式,其中,该第七公式表示为: In an actual application, the network device determines whether the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix satisfy the seventh formula, wherein the seventh formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000117
其中,Wi表示rank=1的PMI为i的预编码码字,w1表示rank=1的PMI码本,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000118
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000119
的共轭转置矩阵,Qmod(m,L)表示L个测量子帧中的测量子帧序号为m的第一导频加权矩阵,δ表示约束门限值;
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000117
Wherein, W i represents a precoding codeword with a P=1 of rank=1, and w 1 represents a PMI codebook of rank=1,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000118
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000119
a conjugate transposed matrix, Qmod(m, L) represents a first pilot weighting matrix in which the measurement subframe number of the L measurement subframes is m, and δ represents a constraint threshold value;
网络设备将满足该第七公式的第一导频加权矩阵确定为该第二导频加权矩阵。The network device determines the first pilot weighting matrix satisfying the seventh formula as the second pilot weighting matrix.
可见,若该第一导频加权矩阵为预设的导频加权矩阵,且当被调度的为单用户,网络设备先获取该一个UE的目标权值矩阵,并根据该第一导频加权矩阵和该一个UE的目标权值矩阵确定该目标导频加权矩阵,具体的确定方式如第七公式,其中,该方式用于测量子帧下确定的目标导频加权矩阵,其中,该目标导频加权矩阵用于对下一次的导频信号作加权发送,从而有效提高下行信道的精度。It can be seen that, if the first pilot weight matrix is a preset pilot weight matrix, and when scheduled as a single user, the network device first acquires a target weight matrix of the UE, and according to the first pilot weight matrix Determining the target pilot weight matrix with the target weight matrix of the one UE, and the specific determining manner is the seventh formula, where the method is used to measure the target pilot weight matrix determined under the subframe, where the target pilot The weighting matrix is used for weighted transmission of the next pilot signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
在一些可能的实现方式中,网络设备还需要确定目标预编码码字,并根据该目标预编码码字和该第二导频加权矩阵对下一次的数据信号加权,以提高下行信道的精度,由于网络设备可能先确定第二导频加权矩阵,并没有确定目标预编码码字,则网络设备利用第八公式确定目标预编码码字,其中,该第八公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, the network device further needs to determine a target precoding codeword, and weight the next data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix to improve accuracy of the downlink channel. Since the network device may first determine the second pilot weighting matrix and does not determine the target precoding codeword, the network device determines the target precoding codeword by using the eighth formula, wherein the eighth formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000120
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000121
表示目标预编码码字。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000120
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000121
Represents the target precoding codeword.
可见,若该第一导频加权矩阵为预设的导频加权矩阵时,在网络设备先确定目标导频加权矩阵后,并根据第八公式确定目标预编码码字,其中,该第二导频加权矩阵和该目标预编码码字用于对下一次的数据信号作加权发送,从而有效提高下行信道的精度。It can be seen that, if the first pilot weight matrix is a preset pilot weight matrix, after the network device first determines the target pilot weight matrix, and determining the target precoding codeword according to the eighth formula, where the second guide The frequency weighting matrix and the target precoding codeword are used for weighted transmission of the next data signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
步骤410、网络设备根据所述第二导频加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权得到第二加权导频信号。Step 410: The network device weights the second pilot signal according to the second pilot weight matrix to obtain a second weighted pilot signal.
步骤411、网络设备将第二加权导频信号发送至N个UE。Step 411: The network device sends the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs.
当确定第二导频加权矩阵后,网络设备根据该第二导频加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权,从而得到第二加权导频信号,并将该第二加权导频信号发送至该 N个UE,从而提高了下行信道的精度。After determining the second pilot weight matrix, the network device weights the second pilot signal according to the second pilot weight matrix, thereby obtaining a second weighted pilot signal, and sending the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs, thereby improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
图4所示的实施例介绍了网络设备先确定第二导频加权矩阵,再根据该第二导频加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权得到第二加权导频信号的过程,在一些可能的实施例中,网络设备根据目标预编码码字和该第二导频加权矩阵对第一数据信号加权,从而得到第一加权数据信号,其中,第一数据信号包括控制信息等,并将该第一加权数据信号发送至N个UE,以提高下行信道的精度,也使得MIMO系统下的TM4适用于对MU进行下行传输,有效减少了MU之间的信号干扰。The embodiment shown in FIG. 4 introduces a process in which a network device first determines a second pilot weight matrix, and then weights the second pilot signal according to the second pilot weight matrix to obtain a second weighted pilot signal, where possible. In an embodiment, the network device weights the first data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix, thereby obtaining a first weighted data signal, where the first data signal includes control information, etc., and the A weighted data signal is sent to the N UEs to improve the accuracy of the downlink channel, and the TM4 in the MIMO system is suitable for downlink transmission to the MU, thereby effectively reducing signal interference between the MUs.
下面结合具体示例介绍本发明实施例中的下行传输方法,如图5所示,本发明实施例中下行传输方法的一个应用场景实施例示意图,具体流程包括:The following describes the downlink transmission method in the embodiment of the present invention with reference to a specific example. As shown in FIG. 5, a schematic diagram of an application scenario of the downlink transmission method in the embodiment of the present disclosure includes:
在实际应用中,以网络设备为基站,第一导频信号和第二导频信号均为CRS为例:In practical applications, the network device is used as the base station, and the first pilot signal and the second pilot signal are both CRS:
基站确定用于下行信道估计的CRS,并根据该CRS生成第一导频加权矩阵,若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵,基站将生成的第一导频加权矩阵缓存,该第一导频加权矩阵用于对该CRS作加权处理。The base station determines a CRS for downlink channel estimation, and generates a first pilot weight matrix according to the CRS. If the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, the base station buffers the generated first pilot weight matrix, the first guide A frequency weighting matrix is used to weight the CRS.
基站根据该第一导频加权矩阵对该CRS作加权处理得到加权后的导频信号,即:第一加权导频信号,并将第一加权导频信号发送至N个UE,其中N为大于1的整数,以使得N个UE根据该第一加权导频信号作下行信道估计,N个UE根据该下行信道估计的结果确定对应的下行信道的N个PMI和N个CQI,然后,N个UE向基站反馈该N个PMI和N个CQI,基站将从N个UE接收到的该N个PMI和N个CQI进行本地缓存,以便后续直接利用。The base station performs weighting processing on the CRS according to the first pilot weight matrix to obtain a weighted pilot signal, that is, a first weighted pilot signal, and sends the first weighted pilot signal to N UEs, where N is greater than An integer of 1 such that the N UEs perform downlink channel estimation according to the first weighted pilot signal, and the N UEs determine N PMIs and N CQIs of the corresponding downlink channel according to the result of the downlink channel estimation, and then, N The UE feeds back the N PMIs and the N CQIs to the base station, and the base station locally buffers the N PMIs and N CQIs received from the N UEs for subsequent direct use.
基站根据确定的第一导频加权矩阵和从N个UE接收到的N个PMI作信道重构,由于N个UE确定的N个PMI并不是真实信道的量化,而是经过第一导频加权矩阵变换后的下行信道的量化,因此,在基站侧需要做对应的逆变换才能正确还原出真实下行信道,则具体的方法是基站根据该N个PMI和该第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量,其中,确定N个重构信道主特征向量的具体过程为:记UEu的下行信道为Hu(NR×NT复矩阵,NR 为UE接收天线端口数,NT为基站发送天线端口数),基站在子帧t使用的第一导频加权矩阵QT(NR×NT复矩阵)对CRS作加权发送,但是,为保持CRS加权后的导频功率不变,且保持PMI码字旋转前后的相关性不变,约束第一导频加权矩阵为酉矩阵。UEu根据子帧t的CRS作信道估计并选择的rank=1PMI记为iu,t,对应的rank=1预编码码字记为
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000122
测量子帧记为s1,s2…sm,基站为每个UEu维持一个长度为L的队列
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000123
用于存储UE反馈的PMI,并维持一个长度为L的队列QueWgt用于存储使用的第一导频加权矩阵,队列是从头进入尾,每到一个测量子帧sm,则将该子帧t使用的第一导频加权矩阵
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000124
入队列QueWgt,基站接收到UEu对测量子帧sm计算的
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000125
则将其入队列
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000126
The base station performs channel reconstruction according to the determined first pilot weight matrix and the N PMIs received from the N UEs, because the N PMIs determined by the N UEs are not the quantization of the real channel, but are subjected to the first pilot weighting. Quantization of the downlink channel after the matrix transformation. Therefore, the base station side needs to perform the corresponding inverse transform to correctly restore the real downlink channel. The specific method is that the base station determines N according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix. Reconstructing the channel main feature vector, wherein the specific process of determining the N reconstructed channel main feature vectors is: recording that the downlink channel of UE u is H u (N R × N T complex matrix, and N R is the number of UE receiving antenna ports, N T is the number of antenna ports transmitted by the base station), and the base station weights the CRS by using the first pilot weight matrix Q T (N R × N T complex matrix) used in the subframe t, but to maintain the CRS weighted pilot The power is unchanged, and the correlation before and after the rotation of the PMI codeword is kept unchanged, and the first pilot weight matrix is constrained to be a unitary matrix. UE u performs channel estimation based on the CRS of subframe t and selects rank=1 PMI as i u,t , and the corresponding rank=1 precoding codeword is recorded as
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000122
The measurement subframe is denoted as s 1 , s 2 ... s m , and the base station maintains a queue of length L for each UE u
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000123
For storing the PMI fed back by the UE, and maintaining a queue of length L, Que Wgt, for storing the used first pilot weight matrix, the queue is from the beginning to the end, and each time a measurement subframe s m is used, the subframe is used. First pilot weighting matrix used by t
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000124
In the queue Que Wgt , the base station receives the UE u calculated for the measurement subframe s m
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000125
Then queue it
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000126
假设在子帧t,基站接收到的最近L次反馈PMI对应的测量子帧为:s1,s2…sm,则队列QueWgt中从头至尾的元素为Q1,Q2…Qm,队列
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000127
中从头至尾的元素为:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000128
基站按如下方式确定N个重构信道主特征向量(以下简记为重构信道):
Assume that in subframe t, the measurement subframe corresponding to the last L feedback PMI received by the base station is: s 1 , s 2 ... s m , then the elements from the beginning to the end of the queue Que Wgt are Q 1 , Q 2 ... Q m ,queue
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000127
The elements from beginning to end are:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000128
The base station determines N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors (hereinafter abbreviated as reconstructed channels) as follows:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000129
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000129
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000130
表示子帧t上确定的用户设备u的重构信道主特征向量,PrimEigVec表示求取矩阵的主特征向量,L表示预设长度内测量子帧的总个数,m是测量子帧序号,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000131
表示测量子帧为sm的第一导频加权矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000132
表示用户设备u对测量子帧sm的CRS作信道估计后选择的PMI,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000133
表示PMI为
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000134
对应的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000135
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000136
对应的共轭转置矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000137
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000138
对应的共轭转置矩阵。
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000130
Representing the reconstructed channel main feature vector of the user equipment u determined on the subframe t, PrimEigVec represents the main feature vector of the matrix, L represents the total number of measurement subframes within the preset length, and m is the measurement subframe number.
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000131
Representing a first pilot weighting matrix in which the measurement subframe is s m ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000132
Indicates the PMI selected by the user equipment u after channel estimation for the CRS of the measurement subframe s m ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000133
Indicates that the PMI is
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000134
Corresponding precoding codeword,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000135
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000136
Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000137
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000138
Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix.
具体做法是:求
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000139
的SVD,然后取其最大奇异值对应的右奇异向量。其中,队列长度L(即重构窗口长度)的设置准则是:L次反馈所用的时间在信道相干时间以内,L尽可能大。例如:按照相干时间计算公式
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000140
对于2GHz的载频,用户移动性3km/h,相干时间约为76ms,若反馈周期为10ms,则L≤8。为保守起见,可取L=5,但不限于此值,重构信道的计算只在基站接收到UE反馈的PMI时进行。在一个UE的两次PMI反馈之间的子帧,重构信道等于最近一次信道重构计算的结果,重构信道与反馈的CQI一起作为下行调度模块(用于确定被调度的用户数)的输入。
The specific approach is: seeking
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000139
The SVD is then taken to the right singular vector corresponding to its largest singular value. The setting criterion of the queue length L (ie, the length of the reconstruction window) is that the time used for the L times of feedback is within the channel coherence time, and L is as large as possible. For example: Calculate the formula according to the coherence time
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000140
For a carrier frequency of 2 GHz, the user mobility is 3 km/h, the coherence time is about 76 ms, and if the feedback period is 10 ms, then L ≤ 8. For the sake of conservatism, L=5 may be taken, but is not limited to this value, and the calculation of the reconstructed channel is performed only when the base station receives the PMI fed back by the UE. In a subframe between two PMI feedbacks of one UE, the reconstructed channel is equal to the result of the latest channel reconstruction calculation, and the reconstructed channel is used together with the fed back CQI as a downlink scheduling module (for determining the number of users scheduled) Input.
基站确定重构信道后,获取缓存的用户CQI,基站根据该CQI和重构信道的结果确定单用户调度还是多用户调度,即从该N个UE中确定M个被调度的UE,M为不大于N的整数。若调度模块决定在子帧t内只调度一个UE,将一个UE的重构信道
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000141
作为下行发送的目标权值。由于TM4只允许从预编码码本中选择权值矩阵,因此需要找到一个rank=1的PMI码字Wi∈w1(w1是rank=1PMI码本,每个码字都是NT×1复向量,定义见3GPP TS36.211),使得存在备选导频加权矩阵集
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000142
将Wi旋转为
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000143
满足上式的酉矩阵存在且不唯一,一种求解备选导频加权矩阵集
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000144
的方法如下:
After the base station determines the reconstructed channel, the cached user CQI is obtained, and the base station determines whether the single-user scheduling or the multi-user scheduling is performed according to the CQI and the result of the reconstructed channel, that is, determining M scheduled UEs from the N UEs, where M is not An integer greater than N. If the scheduling module decides to schedule only one UE in the subframe t, the reconstructed channel of one UE
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000141
As the target weight for downlink transmission. Since TM4 only allows the selection of the weight matrix from the precoding codebook, it is necessary to find a PMI codeword W i ∈w 1 with rank= 1 (w 1 is the rank=1 PMI codebook, and each codeword is N T × 1 complex vector, as defined in 3GPP TS 36.211), such that there is an alternative pilot weighting matrix set
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000142
Rotate W i to
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000143
The existence of the unitary matrix satisfying the above formula is not unique, and one is to solve the set of alternative pilot weighting matrices.
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000144
The method is as follows:
首先,随机生成两组复向量,每组包含(NT-1)个NT×1复向量:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000145
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000146
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000147
为第一组辅助向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000148
为第二组辅助向量。
First, two sets of complex vectors are randomly generated, each group containing (N T -1) N T ×1 complex vectors:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000145
and
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000146
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000147
Is the first set of auxiliary vectors,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000148
Is the second set of auxiliary vectors.
然后对
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000149
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000150
分别执行Gram-Schmidt正交化操作(详细过程如下),从而构成两组标准正交基(由于Wi
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000151
都是单位向量,它们本身在标准正交基中):
Then right
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000149
versus
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000150
Run the Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization operation (as detailed below), so as to constitute two orthonormal basis (since W i and
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000151
Are unit vectors, which are themselves in the standard orthonormal basis):
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000152
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000152
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000153
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000153
对由上述标准正交基构成的酉矩阵
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000154
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000155
则备选导频加权矩阵集为:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000156
其中,Gram-Schmidt正交化的步骤方法是:将一组N个N维向量{X1,X2,XN}变换为一组标准正交集
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000157
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000158
a unitary matrix composed of the above-mentioned standard orthogonal basis
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000154
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000155
Then the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices is:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000156
The step of the Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is to transform a set of N N-dimensional vectors {X 1 , X 2 , X N } into a set of standard orthogonal sets.
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000157
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000158
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000159
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000159
若调度模块决定在子帧t内由UE子集U={u1,…ur}共r个用户配对,根据这些用户的当前重构信道
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000160
计算的下行发送权值矩阵记为
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000161
(NT×r复矩阵,后面简记为信道重构-波束赋形(英文全称:Channel Reconstruction-BeamForming,缩写:CR-BF)权值),各列分别表示配对的各用户的发送权值,每个用户的权值功率均分,即:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000162
由于TM4只允许从码本中选择权值矩阵,因此,找到一个rank=r的PMI码字Wi∈wr(wr是rank=r PMI码本,每个码字都是NT×r复矩阵,定义见3GPP TS36.211),使得存在备选导频加权矩阵集
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000163
恰好将Wi旋转为
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000164
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000165
If the scheduling module decides that a total of r user pairs are paired by the UE subset U={u 1 ,...u r } in the subframe t, according to the current reconstructed channel of the users
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000160
The calculated downlink transmission weight matrix is recorded as
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000161
(N T × r complex matrix, which is hereinafter referred to as channel reconstruction-beamforming (English full name: Channel Reconstruction-BeamForming, abbreviated: CR-BF) weight), each column represents the transmission weight of each paired user , each user's weight power is equally divided, namely:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000162
Since TM4 only allows the selection of the weight matrix from the codebook, a rank=r PMI codeword W i ∈w r is found (w r is the rank=r PMI codebook, and each codeword is N T ×r Complex matrix, as defined in 3GPP TS 36.211), such that there is an alternative pilot weighting matrix set
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000163
Just rotate W i to
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000164
which is
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000165
LTE协议定义的PMI码本有这样的性质,每个码字矩阵的各列是正交的,由于酉矩阵变换保持向量间的相关性不变,必须保证
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000166
的各列也是正交的,才存在严格满足上式的酉矩阵。然而在实际应用中,并不能保证被调度的多个用户的权值之间严格正交,因此本发明提出下面的基于调度约束的备选导频加权矩阵集求解方法:
The PMI codebook defined by the LTE protocol has such a property that each column of each codeword matrix is orthogonal, and since the matrix matrix transformation maintains the correlation between vectors, it must be guaranteed.
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000166
The columns are also orthogonal, and there is a unitary matrix that strictly satisfies the above formula. However, in practical applications, it is not guaranteed that the weights of the scheduled multiple users are strictly orthogonal. Therefore, the present invention proposes the following method for solving the candidate pilot weighting matrix set based on scheduling constraints:
首先,在现有的用户配对准则上增加一条约束:任意两个配对用户的CR-BF权值之间的相关性必须低于一个预设的门限z∈(0,1),即: First, a constraint is added to the existing user pairing criteria: the correlation between the CR-BF weights of any two paired users must be lower than a preset threshold z∈(0,1), namely:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000167
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000167
例如:取z=0.1,实际取值不限于此值。For example: take z=0.1, the actual value is not limited to this value.
在一些可能的实现方式中,用于最多2个用户配对的场景下,直接根据个用户的重构信道判断是否满足配对要求,假设当u1和u2配对时,根据该两个用户的重构信道计算出发送权值:In some possible implementation manners, in a scenario for pairing up to two users, it is directly determined according to the reconstructed channel of the user whether the matching requirement is met, and if u 1 and u 2 are paired, according to the weight of the two users Construct a channel to calculate the transmission weight:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000168
,其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000169
表示目标权值矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000170
表示u1对应的重构信道主特征向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000171
表示u2对应的重构信道主特征向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000172
表示u1对应的权值向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000173
表示u2对应的权值向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000174
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000175
的共轭转置矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000176
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000177
的共轭转置矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000178
表示对角阵,用于使得
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000179
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000180
的模平方都为1/2。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000168
,among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000169
Represents the target weight matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000170
Representing the reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to u 1 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000171
Representing the reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to u 2 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000172
Represents the weight vector corresponding to u 1 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000173
Represents the weight vector corresponding to u 2 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000174
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000175
Conjugate transposed matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000176
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000177
Conjugate transposed matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000178
Representing a diagonal array, used to make
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000179
with
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000180
The square of the modulus is 1/2.
其中,对角阵
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000181
的效果是使得权值矩阵的权值向量均为0.5,两个用户总发送的权值向量为1,即:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000182
由于权值存在如下的重要性质,两个用户的权值之间的相关性等于其重构信道之间的相关性,即:
Among them, diagonal array
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000181
The effect is that the weight vector of the weight matrix is 0.5, and the weight vector sent by the two users is 1, that is:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000182
Since the weight has the following important properties, the correlation between the weights of the two users is equal to the correlation between the reconstructed channels, namely:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000183
可见,当两个用户配对时,直接根据该两个用户的重构信道判断是否满足配对条件
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000184
从而降低了用户调度过程中的计算复杂度。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000183
It can be seen that when two users are paired, whether the pairing condition is satisfied is directly determined according to the reconstructed channels of the two users.
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000184
Thereby reducing the computational complexity in the user scheduling process.
然后,随机生成两组复向量,每组包含NT-r个NT×1复向量:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000185
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000186
Then, two sets of complex vectors are randomly generated, each group containing N T -r N T ×1 complex vectors:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000185
and
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000186
其次,记Wi=[Wi,1,…,Wi,r],对
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000187
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000188
分别执行Gram-Schmidt正交化操作,构成两组标准正交基:
Second, remember that W i =[W i,1 ,...,W i,r ],
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000187
versus
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000188
The Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization operation is performed separately to form two sets of standard orthogonal bases:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000189
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000189
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000190
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000190
最后,对由上述标准正交基构成的酉矩阵
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000191
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000192
则确定备选导频加权矩阵集为:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000193
Finally, the unitary matrix composed of the above-mentioned standard orthogonal basis
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000191
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000192
Then determine the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000193
在上面的过程中,备选导频加权矩阵集的计算依赖于所选的PMI。对于不同的PMI对应的预编码码字Wi(rank=1或rank>1),都可以求出对应的备选导频加权矩阵集,但是这一过程中未考虑第一导频加权矩阵对信道重构性能的影响。从原理上来说,在信道重构窗口内,希望第一导频加权矩阵尽可能均匀地旋转信道,才能使PMI量化误差均匀分布、通过重构操作能够降低量化误差,即,从备选导频加权矩阵集中选择第二导频加权矩阵作为下一次CRS的加权发送,并将该第二导频加权矩阵对应的目标预编码码字和该第二导频加权矩阵作为下一次数据信号的加权发送。因此,本发明提出如下的第二导频加权矩阵的选择方法: In the above process, the calculation of the set of alternative pilot weighting matrices depends on the selected PMI. For the precoding codewords W i (rank=1 or rank>1) corresponding to different PMIs, the corresponding candidate pilot weighting matrix set can be obtained, but the first pilot weighting matrix pair is not considered in this process. The impact of channel reconstruction performance. In principle, in the channel reconstruction window, it is desirable that the first pilot weight matrix rotates the channel as uniformly as possible, so that the PMI quantization error is uniformly distributed, and the quantization error can be reduced by the reconstruction operation, that is, from the candidate pilot. The second pilot weighting matrix is selected as the weighted transmission of the next CRS, and the target precoding codeword corresponding to the second pilot weight matrix and the second pilot weight matrix are used as the weighted transmission of the next data signal. . Therefore, the present invention proposes a selection method of the second pilot weighting matrix as follows:
第一种:在子帧t的初始状态,针对下行测量子帧s0,记调度用户集合为U0,调度用户数为r0,CR-BF权值为
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000194
在rank=r0的预编码码本中随机选择一个预编码码字
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000195
计算出
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000196
作为子帧s0的CRS的第二导频加权矩阵为:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000197
The first type: in the initial state of the subframe t, for the downlink measurement subframe s 0 , the scheduled user set is U 0 , the number of scheduling users is r 0 , and the CR-BF weight is
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000194
Randomly selecting a precoding codeword in a precoding codebook with rank=r 0
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000195
Calculate
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000196
The second pilot weighting matrix of the CRS as the subframe s 0 is:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000197
第二种:在下行测量子帧sm,m=1,2,…,记调度用户集合为Um,调度用户数为rm,CR-BF权值为
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000198
在rank=rm的预编码码本中按照下面的公式选择目标预编码码字:
The second type: in the downlink measurement subframe s m , m = 1, 2, ..., the scheduling user set is U m , the number of scheduling users is r m , and the CR-BF weight is
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000198
The target precoding codeword is selected in the precoding codebook of rank=r m according to the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000199
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000199
该公式的意义是:在测量子帧sm,计算所有可能的预编码码字Wi对应的旋转矩阵
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000200
然后逐一与之前的测量子帧的已确定的导频加权矩阵
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000201
比较,选择使最小距离最大化的预编码码字
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000202
用于子帧sm的数据信号的加权,对应的备选导频加权矩阵
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000203
作为子帧sm的CRS的第二导频加权矩阵为:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000204
The meaning of the formula is: in the measurement sub-frame s m , calculate the rotation matrix corresponding to all possible pre-coded code words W i
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000200
Then the determined pilot weighting matrix of the previous measurement subframes one by one
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000201
Compare, select the precoding codeword that maximizes the minimum distance
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000202
Weighting of data signals for subframe s m , corresponding candidate pilot weighting matrix
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000203
The second pilot weighting matrix of the CRS as the subframe s m is:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000204
其中,dist(A,B)定义为两个酉矩阵A=[a1,a2,…aN]与B=[b1,b2,…bN]之间的距离,体现出酉矩阵对信道的变换效果,距离越大则对信道的旋转越均匀。一种可采用的具体定义为:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000205
Where dist(A, B) is defined as the distance between two 酉 matrices A=[a 1 , a 2 ,...a N ] and B=[b 1 ,b 2 ,...b N ], which represents the 酉 matrix The effect of the channel transformation, the greater the distance, the more uniform the rotation of the channel. One specific definition that can be used is:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000205
第三种:在非测量子帧s,根据该子帧调度结果计算的CR-BF权值记为
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000206
在预编码码本中以任意方式选择Wi∈wr(r为子帧s调度用户数),计算
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000207
这里所指的任意方式包括随机选择,或与测量子帧相同的选择方式,或保持与前一次测量子帧所使用的PMI一致。
The third type: in the non-measurement subframe s, the CR-BF weight calculated according to the scheduling result of the subframe is recorded as
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000206
In the precoding codebook, W i ∈w r (r is the number of scheduled users of the subframe s) is selected in an arbitrary manner, and the calculation is performed.
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000207
Any of the ways referred to herein include random selection, or the same selection as the measurement sub-frame, or remain consistent with the PMI used in the previous measurement sub-frame.
可见,通过对CRS作加权处理及信道重构,提升了下行信道的精度。通过计算得到备选导频加权矩阵集,从该备选导频加权矩阵集中对应的预编码码字中选取某个预编码码字旋转到SU或MU对应的BF权值,从而使得基于码本的预编码码字能够实现非基于码本的BF的效果。通过在备选导频加权矩阵中选取最均匀旋转信道的第二导频加权矩阵,最大程度提高信道重构的准确性。It can be seen that the accuracy of the downlink channel is improved by weighting the CRS and channel reconstruction. Obtaining an alternative pilot weighting matrix set, and selecting a precoding codeword from the corresponding precoding codeword in the candidate pilot weighting matrix set to rotate to a BF weight corresponding to the SU or the MU, thereby making the codebook based The precoding codeword can achieve the effect of non-codebook based BF. The accuracy of channel reconstruction is maximized by selecting the second pilot weighting matrix of the most uniform rotation channel in the candidate pilot weight matrix.
如图6所示,本发明实施例中下行传输方法的另一个应用场景实施例示意图,具体流程包括:FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario embodiment of a downlink transmission method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, where a specific process includes:
与图5所示实施例不同的是,在图6的实施例中,基站提前设置好第一导频加权矩阵,并根据预设的第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号作加权,其中,在测量子帧中使用的第一导频加权矩阵是离线设置的,预先设置了一组由L个NT×NT酉矩阵组成的集合,记为p={Q0,Q1,…,QL-1},L等于重构窗口长度,见图5中的说明。具体的第一导频加权矩阵形式包括但不限于以下三种:Different from the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, in the embodiment of FIG. 6, the base station sets the first pilot weight matrix in advance, and weights the first pilot signal according to the preset first pilot weight matrix. Wherein, the first pilot weight matrix used in the measurement subframe is set offline, and a set of L N T × N T酉 matrices is pre-set, which is denoted as p={Q 0 , Q 1 , ..., Q L-1 }, L is equal to the reconstructed window length, as illustrated in Figure 5. The specific first pilot weight matrix form includes but is not limited to the following three types:
第一种为MUB加权矩阵:The first is the MUB weighting matrix:
对于d维复向量空间,其两组标准正交基E={e0,e1,…,ed-1}和F={f0,f1,…,fd-1}被称为“互为无偏的基”(英文全称:Mutually Unbiased Bases,缩写:MUB),当且仅当两组基内的任意基向量之间的内积的模平方 等于空间维数的倒数:For the d-dimensional complex vector space, the two sets of standard orthogonal bases E={e 0 , e 1 ,..., e d-1 } and F={f 0 ,f 1 ,...,f d-1 } are called "Mutually Unbiased Bases" (English: Muttaly Unbiased Bases, abbreviated: MUB), if and only if the modulus square of the inner product between any two base vectors is equal to the reciprocal of the space dimension:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000208
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000208
理论上已经证明:若空间维数d恰好为某质数的整数次幂,则一定可以找到(d+1)组标准正交基构成该空间的MUB。It has been proved theoretically that if the spatial dimension d is exactly the integer power of a prime number, then the (d+1) set of standard orthogonal bases must be found to form the MUB of the space.
目前LTE系统设计中,基站的天线端口数NT总是为2的整数次幂,因此总可以构造包含(NT+1)组标准正交基的MUB:Current LTE system design, the number of antenna ports of the base station is always N T is an integer power of 2, so the total structure can comprise (N T +1) orthonormal basis of MUB:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000209
l=0,1,…,NT,将其中每一组标准正交基内的各个基向量按列排成矩阵,得到(NT+1)个酉矩阵:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000209
l=0,1,...,N T , and each base vector in each set of standard orthogonal bases is arranged in a matrix to obtain (N T +1) unitary matrices:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000210
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000210
一般而言重构窗口长度设置为L≤(NT+1),因此取前L个矩阵构成的集合Q={Q0,Q1,…,QL-1}作为第一导频加权矩阵集合。In general, the reconstruction window length is set to L ≤ (N T +1), so the set of the first L matrices Q={Q 0 , Q 1 , . . . , Q L-1 } is taken as the first pilot weight matrix. set.
第二种为Kerdock加权矩阵:The second is the Kerdock weighting matrix:
对于基站为2天线端口或4天线端口,存在一种简化的MUB加权矩阵,其特点是矩阵内各个元素只在{0,±1,±j}中取值。此种特点有利于减小离线加权矩阵的存储开销和加权时的运算开销。For a base station of 2 antenna ports or 4 antenna ports, there is a simplified MUB weighting matrix, which is characterized in that each element in the matrix only takes values in {0, ±1, ±j}. This feature is beneficial to reduce the storage overhead of the offline weight matrix and the computational overhead when weighting.
基站为2天线端口时的第一导频加权矩阵集合为Q={Q0,Q1,Q2},其中,The first pilot weighting matrix set when the base station is a 2-antenna port is Q={Q 0 , Q 1 , Q 2 }, where
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000211
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000211
基站为4天线端口时的第一导频加权矩阵集合为 Q={Q0,Q1,Q2,Q3,Q4},其中,The first pilot weighting matrix set when the base station is a 4-antenna port is Q={Q 0 , Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , Q 4 }, where
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000212
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000212
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000213
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000213
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000214
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000214
第三种为相位旋转加权矩阵:The third is the phase rotation weighting matrix:
目前LTE的基站大多采用交叉极化天线,即天线阵列可以分为两组极化方向,一般将天线端口号0~(NT/2-1)分配给一个极化方向的天线,将天线端口号NT/2~(NT-1)分配给另一极化方向的天线。At present, most LTE base stations use cross-polarized antennas, that is, antenna arrays can be divided into two sets of polarization directions. Generally, antenna port numbers 0 to (N T /2-1) are assigned to one polarization direction antenna, and antenna ports are used. The number N T /2 to (N T -1) is assigned to the antenna of the other polarization direction.
基站为2天线端口时,第一导频加权矩阵为如下形式:When the base station is a 2-antenna port, the first pilot weight matrix is in the following form:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000215
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000215
旋转相位取值的一个例子是L=3,θ0=0,θ1=π/2,θ2=π/4,但不必限于此,θl表示两个极化方向之间的旋转角度。 An example of the value of the rotational phase is L = 3, θ 0 =0, θ 1 = π/2, θ 2 = π / 4, but is not necessarily limited thereto, and θ l represents the angle of rotation between the two polarization directions.
基站为4天线端口时,第一导频加权矩阵为如下形式:When the base station is a 4-antenna port, the first pilot weight matrix is in the following form:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000216
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000216
其中m=0,1,…,M-1,n=0,1,…,N-1分别是两组相位旋转角度的索引,M×N=L,总索引l=m+(n-1)M。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000217
表示同一极化方向内相邻天线之间的旋转角度。旋转相位取值的一个例子是:
Where m=0,1,...,M-1,n=0,1,...,N-1 are the indices of the two sets of phase rotation angles respectively, M×N=L, total index l=m+(n-1) M.
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000217
Indicates the angle of rotation between adjacent antennas in the same polarization direction. An example of a rotational phase value is:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000218
但不必限于此。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000218
But it is not necessarily limited to this.
在实际应用中,无论使用何种离线设置第一导频加权矩阵集合,在测量子帧循环使用该集合中的各个矩阵对第一导频信号作加权处理。假设测量子帧为s0,s1,s2,…,则在子帧sm,使用第一导频加权矩阵Ql,l=mod(m,L),其中mod(m,L)表示整数m对整数L取余。In practical applications, regardless of the offline setting of the first pilot weighting matrix set, the first pilot signal is weighted using the respective matrices in the set in the measurement subframe. Assuming that the measurement subframe is s 0 , s 1 , s 2 , . . . , in the subframe s m , the first pilot weight matrix Q l , l=mod(m, L) is used, where mod(m, L) represents The integer m takes the remainder of the integer L.
在测量子帧仅作SU调度。不作MU的原因是:用预设的第一导频加权矩阵无法保证发送权值与预编码码字吻合,此时UE的解调性能有损失,而SU的鲁棒性较强,解调损失对用户速率的影响较小,若作MU则用户速率损失可能很大。The measurement subframe is only used for SU scheduling. The reason why the MU is not used is that the preset first pilot weighting matrix cannot guarantee that the transmission weight is consistent with the precoding codeword. At this time, the demodulation performance of the UE is lost, and the robustness of the SU is strong, and the demodulation loss is high. The impact on user rate is small, and if MU is used, the user rate loss may be large.
在现有SU调度准则基础上增加一条约束,要求对于被调度的用户,能够找到一个预编码矩阵,经过第一导频加权矩阵旋转之后,与其CR-BF权值之间的相关性不低于某个门限。具体来说,在测量子帧sm,假设某个UEu的CR-BF权值为
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000219
所使用的第一导频加权矩阵为Qmod(m,L),增加的调 度约束为:
Adding a constraint based on the existing SU scheduling criteria requires that a precoding matrix can be found for the scheduled users. After the first pilot weight matrix is rotated, the correlation between the CR-BF weights and the CR-BF weights is not lower. A certain threshold. Specifically, in measuring the subframe s m , suppose the CR-BF weight of a certain UEu is
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000219
The first pilot weighting matrix used is Qmod(m,L), and the increased scheduling constraint is:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000220
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000220
门限的取值范围为δ∈(0,1),越大则约束越严格。一个例子为δ=0.8,但不限于此。可见,将满足上式的第一导频加权矩阵作为第二导频加权矩阵,其中,该第二导频加权矩阵用于对下一次的导频信号作加权发送。The threshold value ranges from δ∈(0,1), and the larger the constraint, the stricter the constraint. An example is δ = 0.8, but is not limited to this. It can be seen that the first pilot weight matrix that satisfies the above formula is used as the second pilot weight matrix, and the second pilot weight matrix is used for weighted transmission of the next pilot signal.
不满足此约束的用户不能在当前子帧被调度,若约束满足,则所选的预编码矩阵为:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000221
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000222
表示目标预编码码字。当确定目标预编码码字后,该目标预编码码字和该第二导频加权矩阵用于对下一次的数据信号作加权发送。
Users who do not satisfy this constraint cannot be scheduled in the current subframe. If the constraint is satisfied, the selected precoding matrix is:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000221
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000222
Represents the target precoding codeword. After determining the target precoding codeword, the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weighting matrix are used for weighted transmission of the next data signal.
在非测量子帧作MU调度,其调度准则修改、CR-BF权值计算、第二导频加权矩阵计算与PMI选择类似图5所示的实施例,不同之处在于,在非测量子帧无需考虑第一导频加权矩阵对信道重构的影响,因此,PMI可以任意选择。The MU scheduling in the non-measurement subframe, the scheduling criterion modification, the CR-BF weight calculation, the second pilot weight matrix calculation and the PMI selection are similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, except that in the non-measurement subframe There is no need to consider the influence of the first pilot weighting matrix on channel reconstruction, so the PMI can be arbitrarily chosen.
为便于更好的实施本发明实施例的上述相关方法,下面还提供用于配合上述方法的网络设备。In order to facilitate the implementation of the above related method of the embodiments of the present invention, a network device for supporting the foregoing method is also provided below.
请参阅图7,本发明实施例中网络设备700的一个结构示意图,该网络设备为多输入多输出系统中的设备,该网络设备700包括:接收模块701,第一确定模块702,第二确定模块703,第三确定模块704和发送模块705。Referring to FIG. 7, a schematic structural diagram of a network device 700 in the embodiment of the present invention, the network device is a device in a multiple input multiple output system, the network device 700 includes: a receiving module 701, a first determining module 702, and a second determining Module 703, third determining module 704 and transmitting module 705.
接收模块701,用于接收N个预编码矩阵指示PMI,其中,N为大于1的整数,所述N个PMI是N个用户设备UE根据所述网络设备发送的第一加权导频信号所确定的,所述第一加权导频信号是由所述网络设备根据第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权得到的;The receiving module 701 is configured to receive N precoding matrix indication PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are determined by the N user equipment UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device. The first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix;
第一确定模块702,用于根据所述接收模块701接收的所述N个PMI和所述第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量;The first determining module 702 is configured to determine N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix received by the receiving module 701;
第二确定模块703,用于从所述N个UE中确定M个被调度的UE;a second determining module 703, configured to determine M scheduled UEs from the N UEs;
第三确定模块704,用于根据所述第二确定模块703确定的所述M个被 调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵,其中,M为不大于N的整数;a third determining module 704, configured to determine, according to the second determining module 703, the M Determining, by the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the scheduled UEs, a second pilot weighting matrix, where M is an integer not greater than N;
发送模块705,用于将所述第三确定模块704确定的所述第二加权导频信号发送至所述N个UE,其中,所述第二加权导频信号是由所述网络设备根据所述第二导频加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权得到的。The sending module 705 is configured to send the second weighted pilot signal determined by the third determining module 704 to the N UEs, where the second weighted pilot signal is determined by the network device The second pilot weight matrix is weighted by the second pilot signal.
与现有技术不同的是,接收模块701接收N个PMI,其中,N为大于1的整数,该N个PMI是N个UE根据该网络设备发送的第一加权导频信号所确定的,而该第一加权导频信号是该网络设备根据该第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权得到的,当该网络设备对第一导频信号加权后,UE真实所见的并非第一导频信号,也不是通过第一导频信号确定PMI的,而UE真实所见的是第一加权导频信号,是通过该第一加权导频信号作下行信道估计后确定PMI的,从而扩大了PMI的选择范围,由于该N个PMI并不是真实下行信道的量化,而是经过第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权后的下行信道的量化,因此,该网络设备需要做对应的逆变换才能正确还原出真实下行信道,则该网络设备根据该N个PMI和第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量,第二确定模块703从N个UE中确定M个被调度的UE,然后第三确定模块704根据该第二确定模块703确定的M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵,这样,就可以通过该第二加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权得到第二加权导频信号,发送模块705将该第二加权导频信号发送至N个UE,从而减少了下行信道的量化误差,更好地抑制用户间的干扰,提高了下行信道的精度。Different from the prior art, the receiving module 701 receives N PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are determined by the N UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device, and The first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix. When the network device weights the first pilot signal, the UE actually sees that the first pilot signal is not the first one. The pilot signal does not determine the PMI by using the first pilot signal, and the UE actually sees the first weighted pilot signal, which is determined by using the first weighted pilot signal for downlink channel estimation, thereby expanding the PMI. The selection range of the PMI, since the N PMIs are not the quantization of the real downlink channel, but the quantization of the downlink channel weighted by the first pilot weight matrix by the first pilot weight matrix, therefore, the network device needs to respond The inverse transform can correctly restore the real downlink channel, and the network device determines N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix, and the second determining module 703 determines M from the N UEs. Being scheduled The UE, and then the third determining module 704 determines the second pilot weighting matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs determined by the second determining module 703, so that the first pilot weighting matrix can be adopted. The second weighting matrix weights the second pilot signal to obtain the second weighted pilot signal, and the sending module 705 sends the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs, thereby reducing the quantization error of the downlink channel and better suppressing the inter-user The interference improves the accuracy of the downlink channel.
请参阅图8,为网络设备700的另一个结构示意图,该网络设备700包括:接收模块701,第一确定模块702,第二确定模块703,第三确定模块704和发送模块705和第四确定模块706。Please refer to FIG. 8 , which is another schematic structural diagram of a network device 700. The network device 700 includes: a receiving module 701, a first determining module 702, a second determining module 703, a third determining module 704, and a sending module 705, and a fourth determining. Module 706.
接收模块701,用于接收N个预编码矩阵指示PMI,其中,N为大于1的整数,所述N个PMI是N个用户设备UE根据所述网络设备发送的第一加权导频信号所确定的,所述第一加权导频信号是由所述网络设备根据第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权得到的。The receiving module 701 is configured to receive N precoding matrix indication PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are determined by the N user equipment UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device. The first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵、预设 的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个。In some possible implementation manners, the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, preset At least one of the pilot weighting matrices.
该第一导频加权矩阵是上一次导频加权确定的目标导频加权矩阵,用于对这一次的导频信号加权,由于现有技术中并没有对导频信号加权,因此初次对导频信号加权的第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,将第二次导频信号加权后确定的目标导频加权矩阵作为第三次的第一导频加权矩阵,并根据该第一导频加权矩阵对第三次的导频信号加权,以此类推,此处不做具体限定。The first pilot weighting matrix is a target pilot weighting matrix determined by the last pilot weighting, and is used to weight the pilot signal of this time. Since the pilot signal is not weighted in the prior art, the pilot is initially used. The signal-weighted first pilot weighting matrix is at least one of a unit weighting matrix and a preset pilot weighting matrix, and the target pilot weighting matrix determined by weighting the second pilot signal is used as the third first guiding And frequency-weighting the matrix, and weighting the third pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix, and so on, which is not specifically limited herein.
第一确定模块702,用于根据所述接收模块701接收的所述N个PMI和所述第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量。The first determining module 702 is configured to determine N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix received by the receiving module 701.
第一确定模块702根据该N个PMI和第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量的方式有很多种,一种可能的方式包括:The first determining module 702 determines a plurality of reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix. One possible manner includes:
所述第一确定模块702具体用于根据所述N个PMI确定所述N个PMI对应的N个预编码码字;确定所述N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及所述第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵;根据所述N个预编码码字,所述第一导频加权矩阵,所述N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及所述第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵确定所述N个重构信道主特征向量。The first determining module 702 is specifically configured to determine N precoding codewords corresponding to the N PMIs according to the N PMIs; determine a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix; the first pilot weight matrix, the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoded codewords according to the N precoding codewords The conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix determines the N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一确定模块702具体用于根据所述N个预编码码字,所述第一导频加权矩阵,所述N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及所述第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵利用第一公式确定所述N个重构信道主特征向量,其中,所述第一公式表示为:In some possible implementations, the first determining module 702 is specifically configured to: according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, and the conjugate transitions corresponding to the N precoding codewords The set matrix and the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix determine the N reconstructed channel main feature vectors by using a first formula, wherein the first formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000223
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000224
表示子帧t上确定的用户设备u的重构信道主特征向量,PrimEigVec表示求取矩阵的主特征向量,L表示预设长度内测量子帧的总个数,m是测量子帧序号,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000225
表示测量子帧为sm的第一导频加权矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000226
表示用户设备u对测量子帧sm的第一导频信号作信道估计后选择的PMI,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000227
表示PMI为
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000228
对应的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000229
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000230
对应的共轭转置矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000231
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000232
对应的共轭转置矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000223
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000224
Representing the reconstructed channel main feature vector of the user equipment u determined on the subframe t, PrimEigVec represents the main feature vector of the matrix, L represents the total number of measurement subframes within the preset length, and m is the measurement subframe number.
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000225
Representing a first pilot weighting matrix in which the measurement subframe is s m ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000226
Determining a PMI selected by the user equipment u after channel estimation of the first pilot signal of the measurement subframe s m ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000227
Indicates that the PMI is
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000228
Corresponding precoding codeword,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000229
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000230
Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000231
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000232
Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix.
第二确定模块703,用于从所述N个UE中确定M个被调度的UE。 The second determining module 703 is configured to determine M scheduled UEs from the N UEs.
第三确定模块704,用于根据所述第二确定模块703确定的所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵,其中,M为不大于N的整数。a third determining module 704, configured to determine a second pilot weighting matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs determined by the second determining module 703, where An integer not greater than N.
在一些可能的实现方式中,第三确定模块704根据该M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,先确定备选导频加权矩阵集,然后在该备选导频加权矩阵集中按照某种方式选取某个备选导频加权矩阵作为该第二导频加权矩阵,具体实现过程包括下面几种可能的方式:In some possible implementation manners, the third determining module 704 determines the candidate pilot weight matrix before determining the second pilot weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs. The set, and then selects an alternative pilot weighting matrix as the second pilot weighting matrix in a certain manner in the candidate pilot weighting matrix set. The specific implementation process includes the following possible ways:
第一种可能的方式为:第四确定模块706,用于若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述单位加权矩阵,所述第三确定模块704根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,若所述M为1,根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和所述一个UE对应的预编码码字确定备选导频加权矩阵集。The first possible mode is: a fourth determining module 706, configured to: if the first pilot weight matrix is the unit weight matrix, the third determining module 704 is configured according to the M scheduled UEs Before the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each UE determines the second pilot weight matrix, if the M is 1, the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE are determined. Select the pilot weighting matrix set.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第四确定模块706具体用于根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和所述一个UE对应的预编码码字利用第二公式确定备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,所述第二公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, the fourth determining module 706 is specifically configured to determine, by using a second formula, an alternative pilot weighting according to a reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to one UE and a precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE. a set of matrices, wherein the second formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000233
其中,Wi∈w1
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000234
表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示秩rank=1的PMI为i的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000235
表示一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量,w1表示rank=1的PMI码本。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000233
Among them, W i ∈w 1 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000234
Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword of rank rank=1 with a PMI of i,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000235
Represents a reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to one UE, and w 1 represents a PMI codebook with rank=1.
可见,若被调度的为单用户,且该第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵,则网络设备直接根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和该一个UE对应的预编码码字按照上述第二公式确定该备选导频加权矩阵集,计算量小。It can be seen that, if the single pilot is scheduled to be a single user, and the first pilot weight matrix is a unit weight matrix, the network device directly according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE. The second formula determines the set of candidate pilot weighting matrices with a small amount of computation.
第二种可能的方式为:第四确定模块706,用于若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述单位加权矩阵和所述预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,所述第三确定模块704根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,若所述M为2,根据两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量确定目标权值矩阵;当所述两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向 量的相关性小于第一预设阈值时,根据所述两个UE对应的预编码码字和所述目标权值矩阵确定备选导频加权矩阵集。The second possible mode is: the fourth determining module 706 is configured to: if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of the unit weight matrix and the preset pilot weight matrix, the third The determining module 704 determines, according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, the second pilot weighting matrix, if the M is 2, according to the reconstructed channel corresponding to the two UEs respectively The main feature vector determines a target weight matrix; when the two UEs respectively correspond to the reconstructed channel main feature direction When the correlation of the quantity is less than the first preset threshold, the candidate pilot weight matrix set is determined according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第四确定模块706具体用于根据两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量利用第三公式确定所述目标权值矩阵,其中,所述第三公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, the fourth determining module 706 is specifically configured to determine, according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the two UEs, the target weight matrix by using a third formula, where the third formula is Expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000236
,其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000237
表示目标权值矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000238
表示u1对应的重构信道主特征向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000239
表示u2对应的重构信道主特征向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000240
表示u1对应的权值向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000241
表示u2对应的权值向量,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000242
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000243
的共轭转置矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000244
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000245
的共轭转置矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000246
表示对角阵,用于使得
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000247
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000248
的模平方都为1/2。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000236
,among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000237
Represents the target weight matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000238
Representing the reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to u 1 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000239
Representing the reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to u 2 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000240
Represents the weight vector corresponding to u 1 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000241
Represents the weight vector corresponding to u 2 ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000242
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000243
Conjugate transposed matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000244
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000245
Conjugate transposed matrix,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000246
Representing a diagonal array, used to make
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000247
with
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000248
The square of the modulus is 1/2.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第四确定模块706具体用于根据所述两个UE对应的预编码码字和所述目标权值矩阵利用第四公式确定备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,所述第四公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, the fourth determining module 706 is specifically configured to determine, according to the precoding codewords corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix, a fourth pilot formula to determine an candidate pilot weighting matrix set. Wherein the fourth formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000249
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000250
表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示rank=2的PMI为i的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000251
表示目标权值矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000249
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000250
Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword of rank=2 with a PMI of i,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000251
Represents the target weight matrix.
可见,若被调度的为两个用户,且若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,则网络设备首先确定该两个UE对应的目标权值矩阵,具体的确定方式如第三公式,一般情况下,每个UE对应的目标权值矩阵对应的功率是相同的。然后比较该两个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量的相关性,当两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量的相关性小于第一预设阈值时,两个UE对应的下行信道没有干扰或者干扰较小,其中,该第一预 设阈值一般为1,该第一预设阈值可根据实际情况而定,此处不做具体限定,网络设备才根据该目标权值矩阵和两个UE分别对应的预编码码字确定对应的备选导频加权矩阵集,具体的确定方式如第四公式。It can be seen that if two users are scheduled, and if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, the network device first determines target weights corresponding to the two UEs. The matrix is determined in a specific manner, such as the third formula. Generally, the power corresponding to the target weight matrix corresponding to each UE is the same. Then, the correlation of the reconstructed channel main feature vectors corresponding to the two UEs is compared. When the correlation between the reconstructed channel main feature vectors of the two UEs is less than the first preset threshold, the downlink channels corresponding to the two UEs are not Less interference or interference, wherein the first pre- The threshold is generally set to 1. The first preset threshold may be determined according to an actual situation, and is not specifically limited herein. The network device determines the corresponding preparation according to the target weight matrix and the precoding codewords corresponding to the two UEs respectively. The pilot weighting matrix set is selected, and the specific determination manner is as the fourth formula.
第三种可能的方式为:第四确定模块706,用于若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述单位加权矩阵和所述预设的导频加权矩阵,所述第三确定模块根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,若所述M大于或等于2,根据至少两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量确定目标权值矩阵;当任意两个UE对应的目标权值矩阵的相关性小于第二预设阈值时,根据所述至少两个UE对应的预编码码字和所述目标权值矩阵确定备选导频加权矩阵集。A third possible module is: a fourth determining module 706, configured to: if the first pilot weight matrix is the unit weight matrix and the preset pilot weight matrix, the third determining module is configured according to the Before the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs determines the second pilot weighting matrix, if the M is greater than or equal to 2, the reconstructed channel main features corresponding to the at least two UEs respectively The vector determines a target weight matrix; when the correlation of the target weight matrix corresponding to any two UEs is less than a second preset threshold, determining according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix A set of alternative pilot weighting matrices.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第四确定模块706具体用于根据所述至少两个UE对应的预编码码字和所述目标权值矩阵利用第五公式确定备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,所述第五公式表示为:In some possible implementations, the fourth determining module 706 is specifically configured to determine, by using a fifth formula, an alternative pilot weighting matrix set according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix. Wherein the fifth formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000252
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000253
表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示rank≥2的PMI为i的预编码码字,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000254
表示目标权值矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000252
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000253
Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword with a rank ≥ 2 and a PMI of i,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000254
Represents the target weight matrix.
可见,若被调度的为至少两个用户,且若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,网络设备首先确定该至少两个UE对应的目标权值矩阵,具体的确定方式如第三公式,一般情况下,每个UE对应的目标权值矩阵对应的功率是相同的。当至少两个UE中的任意两个UE分别对应的目标权值矩阵的相关性小于第二预设阈值时,才根据该目标权值矩阵和至少两个UE对应的预编码码字确定该备选导频加权矩阵集,具体的确定方式如第五公式,在实际应用中,该第二预设阈值是由网络设备根据实际情况而定,例如,该第二预设阈值为1,此处不做具体限定。It can be seen that if at least two users are scheduled, and if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, the network device first determines target rights corresponding to the at least two UEs. The value matrix is determined by the third formula. Generally, the power corresponding to the target weight matrix corresponding to each UE is the same. When the correlation of the target weight matrix corresponding to any two of the at least two UEs is less than the second preset threshold, determining the preparation according to the target weight matrix and the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs The second preset threshold is determined by the network device according to the actual situation, for example, the second preset threshold is 1, where the second preset threshold is determined by the network device. No specific restrictions.
当第四确定模块706确定备选导频加权矩阵集后,则根据某种预设方式从该备选导频加权矩阵集中选取某个备选导频加权矩阵作为该第二导频加权矩阵,具体实现过程包括下面几种可能的方式:After the fourth determining module 706 determines the candidate pilot weighting matrix set, the candidate pilot weighting matrix is selected from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set as the second pilot weighting matrix according to a preset manner. The specific implementation process includes the following possible ways:
第一种可能的方式为:若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述单位加权矩阵和所述预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,所述第三确定模块704具体用于随机选 取目标预编码码字,并根据所述目标预编码矩阵从所述备选导频加权矩阵集中选取所述目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵;将所述目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵确定为所述第二导频加权矩阵。The first possible mode is: if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of the unit weight matrix and the preset pilot weight matrix, the third determining module 704 is specifically configured to randomly select Obtaining a target precoding codeword, and selecting, from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set, an candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword according to the target precoding matrix; and using the target precoding codeword A corresponding candidate pilot weighting matrix is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
可见,若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,网络设备从N个UE对应的N个预编码码字中随机选取某个预编码码字作为该目标预编码码字,并根据该目标预编码码字从该备选导频加权矩阵集中选取该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵,然后将目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵作为该第二导频加权矩阵,其中,该方式用于非测量子帧下确定的第二导频加权矩阵,该第二导频加权矩阵用于对下一次的导频信号作加权发送,从而提高下行信道的精度。It can be seen that, if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix, the network device randomly selects a precoding codeword from the N precoding codewords corresponding to the N UEs. Decoding a codeword, and selecting, from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set, an candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword according to the target precoding codeword, and then preparing the target precoding codeword corresponding to the target Selecting a pilot weighting matrix as the second pilot weighting matrix, wherein the mode is used for the second pilot weighting matrix determined under the non-measurement subframe, and the second pilot weighting matrix is used for the next pilot signal Weighted transmission, thereby improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
第二种可能的方式为:当若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述单位加权矩阵,所述第三确定模块704具体用于按照预设规则确定目标预编码码字,并根据所述目标预编码矩阵从所述备选导频加权矩阵集中选取所述目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵;将所述目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵确定为所述第二导频加权矩阵。The second possible mode is: when the first pilot weight matrix is the unit weight matrix, the third determining module 704 is specifically configured to determine a target precoding codeword according to a preset rule, and according to the Selecting, by the target precoding matrix, an candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword from the candidate pilot weighting matrix; determining an candidate pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword as The second pilot weighting matrix is described.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第三确定模块707具体用于利用第六公式确定所述目标预编码码字,其中,所述第六公式表示为:In some possible implementations, the third determining module 707 is specifically configured to determine the target pre-coded codeword by using a sixth formula, where the sixth formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000255
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000256
表示目标预编码码字,n表示测量子帧sm之前的测量子帧的序号,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000257
表示测量子帧为sm对应的备选导频加权矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000255
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000256
Indicates the target precoding codeword, and n denotes the sequence number of the measurement subframe before the measurement subframe s m ,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000257
Indicates that the measurement subframe is an alternate pilot weight matrix corresponding to s m .
可见,若第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵,网络设备按照第六公式确定目标预编码码字,并根据该目标预编码码字从备选导频加权矩阵集中选取该目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵作为该第二导频加权矩阵,其中,该方式用于测量子帧下确定的第二导频加权矩阵,该第二导频加权矩阵用于对下一次的导频信号作加权发送,该目第二导频加权矩阵和该目标预编码码字用于对一次的数据信号作加权发送,从而有效提高下行信道的精度。It can be seen that if the first pilot weighting matrix is a unit weighting matrix, the network device determines the target precoding codeword according to the sixth formula, and selects the target precoding codeword from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the target precoding codeword. Corresponding candidate pilot weight matrix is used as the second pilot weight matrix, wherein the mode is used to measure a second pilot weight matrix determined under the subframe, and the second pilot weight matrix is used for the next pilot The frequency signal is weighted and transmitted, and the second pilot weighting matrix and the target precoding codeword are used for weighted transmission of the primary data signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
在实际应用中,网络设备还可以根据该第一导频加权矩阵中确定该第二导 频加权矩阵,具体实现过程包括下面可能的方式:In a practical application, the network device may further determine the second guide according to the first pilot weight matrix. The frequency weighting matrix, the specific implementation process includes the following possible ways:
第一种可能的方式为:若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述预设的导频加权矩阵,所述第三确定模块704具体用于若所述M为1,获取一个UE的目标权值矩阵;根据所述第一导频加权矩阵和所述一个UE的目标权值矩阵确定所述第二导频加权矩阵。The first possible mode is: if the first pilot weight matrix is the preset pilot weight matrix, the third determining module 704 is specifically configured to acquire a UE target if the M is 1. a weight matrix; determining the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix of the one UE.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第三确定模块704具体用于判断所述第一导频加权矩阵和所述目标权值矩阵是否满足第七公式,其中,所述第七公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, the third determining module 704 is specifically configured to determine whether the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix satisfy a seventh formula, where the seventh formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000258
其中,Wi表示rank=1的PMI为i的预编码码字,w1表示rank=1的PMI码本,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000259
表示
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000260
的共轭转置矩阵,Qmod(m,L)表示L个测量子帧中的测量子帧序号为m的第一导频加权矩阵,δ表示约束门限值;将满足所述第七公式的第一导频加权矩阵确定为所述第二导频加权矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000258
Wherein, W i represents a precoding codeword with a P=1 of rank=1, and w 1 represents a PMI codebook of rank=1,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000259
Express
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000260
a conjugate transposed matrix, Qmod(m, L) represents a first pilot weighting matrix with measurement subframe number m in L measurement subframes, δ represents a constraint threshold; and the seventh formula will be satisfied The first pilot weighting matrix is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
可见,若该第一导频加权矩阵为预设的导频加权矩阵,且当被调度的为单用户,网络设备先获取该一个UE的目标权值矩阵,并根据该第一导频加权矩阵和该一个UE的目标权值矩阵确定该目标导频加权矩阵,具体的确定方式如第七公式,其中,该方式用于测量子帧下确定的目标导频加权矩阵,其中,该目标导频加权矩阵用于对下一次的导频信号作加权发送,从而有效提高下行信道的精度。It can be seen that, if the first pilot weight matrix is a preset pilot weight matrix, and when scheduled as a single user, the network device first acquires a target weight matrix of the UE, and according to the first pilot weight matrix Determining the target pilot weight matrix with the target weight matrix of the one UE, and the specific determining manner is the seventh formula, where the method is used to measure the target pilot weight matrix determined under the subframe, where the target pilot The weighting matrix is used for weighted transmission of the next pilot signal, thereby effectively improving the accuracy of the downlink channel.
在一些可能的实现方式中,网络设备还需要确定目标预编码码字,并根据该目标预编码码字和该第二导频加权矩阵对下一次的数据信号加权,以提高下行信道的精度,由于网络设备可能先确定第二导频加权矩阵,并没有确定目标预编码码字,则所述第四确定模块706,还用于根据所述第一导频加权矩阵和所述目标权值矩阵确定所述第二导频加权矩阵之后,利用第八公式确定目标预编码码字,其中,所述第八公式表示为:In some possible implementation manners, the network device further needs to determine a target precoding codeword, and weight the next data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix to improve accuracy of the downlink channel. The fourth determining module 706 is further configured to use, according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix, that the network device may determine the second pilot weight matrix and determine the target precoding codeword. After determining the second pilot weighting matrix, the target precoding codeword is determined by using an eighth formula, wherein the eighth formula is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000261
其中,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000262
表示目标预编码码字。
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000261
among them,
Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-000262
Represents the target precoding codeword.
发送模块705,用于将所述第三确定模块704确定的所述第二加权导频信 号发送至所述N个UE,其中,所述第二加权导频信号是由所述网络设备根据所述第二导频加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权得到的。a sending module 705, configured to determine, by the third determining module 704, the second weighted pilot signal The number is sent to the N UEs, wherein the second weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the second pilot signal according to the second pilot weight matrix.
在一些可能的实现方式中,所述发送模块705,还用于所述第三确定模块704根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之后,将第一加权数据信号发送至所述N个UE,其中,所述第一加权数据信号是由所述网络设备根据所述目标预编码码字和所述第二导频加权矩阵对第一数据信号加权得到的。In some possible implementations, the sending module 705 is further configured by the third determining module 704 to determine a second pilot according to a reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs. After the weighting matrix, the first weighted data signal is sent to the N UEs, wherein the first weighted data signal is determined by the network device according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix Weighted from the first data signal.
可见,网络设备根据目标预编码码字和该第二导频加权矩阵对第一数据信号加权,从而得到第一加权数据信号,其中,第一数据信号包括控制信息等,并将该第一加权数据信号发送至N个UE,以提高下行信道的精度,也使得MIMO系统下的TM4适用于对MU进行下行传输,有效减少了MU之间的信号干扰。It can be seen that the network device weights the first data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weight matrix, thereby obtaining a first weighted data signal, where the first data signal includes control information, etc., and the first weighting The data signal is sent to the N UEs to improve the accuracy of the downlink channel, and the TM4 in the MIMO system is suitable for downlink transmission to the MU, thereby effectively reducing signal interference between the MUs.
在上述实施例中,对各个实施例的描述都各有侧重,某个实施例中没有详述的部分,可以参见其他实施例的相关描述。In the above embodiments, the descriptions of the various embodiments are different, and the details that are not detailed in a certain embodiment can be referred to the related descriptions of other embodiments.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统,装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。A person skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and brevity of the description, the specific working process of the system, the device and the unit described above can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统,装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided by the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, apparatus, and method may be implemented in other manners. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For example, the division of cells is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or integrated. Go to another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. In addition, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.
作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
另外,在本发明各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一 个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present invention may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated in one unit. In the unit. The above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software functional unit.
集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本发明的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本发明各个实施例方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(ROM,Read-Only Memory)、随机存取存储器(RAM,Random Access Memory)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。An integrated unit, if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product, can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the present invention, which is essential or contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium. A number of instructions are included to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the various embodiments of the present invention. The foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like. .
以上对本发明所提供的一种应用程序组的操作方法及终端进行了详细介绍,本文中应用了具体个例对本发明的原理及实施方式进行了阐述,以上实施例的说明只是用于帮助理解本发明的方法及其核心思想;同时,对于本领域的一般技术人员,依据本发明的思想,在具体实施方式及应用范围上均会有改变之处,综上,本说明书内容不应理解为对本发明的限制。 The operation method and the terminal of an application group provided by the present invention are described in detail above. The principles and implementation manners of the present invention are described in the specific examples. The description of the above embodiments is only used to help understand the present invention. The method of the present invention and its core idea; at the same time, those skilled in the art, according to the idea of the present invention, there will be changes in the specific embodiments and application scope. In summary, the contents of this specification should not be construed as Limitations of the invention.

Claims (36)

  1. 一种下行传输方法,其特征在于,所述方法应用于多输入多输出系统,所述方法包括:A downlink transmission method, characterized in that the method is applied to a multiple input multiple output system, the method comprising:
    网络设备接收N个预编码矩阵指示PMI,其中,N为大于1的整数,所述N个PMI是N个用户设备UE根据所述网络设备发送的第一加权导频信号所确定的,所述第一加权导频信号是由所述网络设备根据第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权得到的;The network device receives N precoding matrix indication PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are determined by the N user equipment UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device, The first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix;
    所述网络设备根据所述N个PMI和所述第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量;Determining, by the network device, N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix;
    所述网络设备从所述N个UE中确定M个被调度的UE,并根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵,其中,M为不大于N的整数;Determining, by the network device, the M scheduled UEs from the N UEs, and determining a second pilot weighting matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, where , M is an integer not greater than N;
    所述网络设备将第二加权导频信号发送至所述N个UE,其中,所述第二加权导频信号是由所述网络设备根据所述第二导频加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权得到的。Transmitting, by the network device, the second weighted pilot signal to the N UEs, where the second weighted pilot signal is used by the network device to compare the second pilot signal according to the second pilot weight matrix Weighted.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 1 wherein
    所述第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵和预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个。The first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备根据所述N个PMI和所述第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining, by the network device, the N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix comprises:
    所述网络设备根据所述N个PMI确定所述N个PMI对应的N个预编码码字;Determining, by the network device, N precoding codewords corresponding to the N PMIs according to the N PMIs;
    所述网络设备确定所述N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及所述第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵;Determining, by the network device, a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords and a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix;
    所述网络设备根据所述N个预编码码字,所述第一导频加权矩阵,所述N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及所述第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵确定所述N个重构信道主特征向量。The network device, according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the first pilot weight matrix The yoke transpose matrix determines the N reconstructed channel main feature vectors.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备根据所述N个预编码码字,所述第一导频加权矩阵,所述N个预编码码字对应的共轭转 置矩阵以及所述第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵确定所述N个重构信道主特征向量包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the network device, according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, and the conjugate rotation corresponding to the N precoding codewords Determining the matrix and the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix to determine the N reconstructed channel main feature vectors includes:
    所述网络设备根据所述N个预编码码字,所述第一导频加权矩阵,所述N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及所述第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵利用第一公式确定所述N个重构信道主特征向量,其中,所述第一公式表示为:The network device, according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the N precoding codewords, and the first pilot weight matrix The yoke transposed matrix determines the N reconstructed channel main feature vectors using a first formula, wherein the first formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100001
    其中,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100002
    表示子帧t上确定的用户设备u的重构信道主特征向量,PrimEigVec表示求取矩阵的主特征向量,L表示预设长度内测量子帧的总个数,m是测量子帧序号,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100003
    表示测量子帧为sm的第一导频加权矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100004
    表示用户设备u对测量子帧sm的第一导频信号作信道估计后选择的PMI,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100005
    表示PMI为
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100006
    对应的预编码码字,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100007
    表示
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100008
    对应的共轭转置矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100009
    表示
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100010
    对应的共轭转置矩阵。
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100001
    among them,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100002
    Representing the reconstructed channel main feature vector of the user equipment u determined on the subframe t, PrimEigVec represents the main feature vector of the matrix, L represents the total number of measurement subframes within the preset length, and m is the measurement subframe number.
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100003
    Representing a first pilot weighting matrix in which the measurement subframe is s m ,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100004
    Determining a PMI selected by the user equipment u after channel estimation of the first pilot signal of the measurement subframe s m ,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100005
    Indicates that the PMI is
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100006
    Corresponding precoding codeword,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100007
    Express
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100008
    Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100009
    Express
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100010
    Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix.
  5. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述单位加权矩阵,所述根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein if the first pilot weight matrix is the unit weight matrix, the reconstructed channel master according to each of the M scheduled UEs Before the feature vector determines the second pilot weight matrix, the method further includes:
    若所述M为1,所述网络设备根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和所述一个UE对应的预编码码字确定备选导频加权矩阵集。If the M is 1, the network device determines the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和所述一个UE对应的预编码码字确定备选导频加权矩阵集包括:The method according to claim 5, wherein the determining, by the network device, the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to one UE and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE comprises:
    所述网络设备根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和所述一个UE对应的预编码码字利用第二公式确定备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,所述第二公式表示为:The network device determines, by using a second formula, an alternative pilot weighting matrix set according to a reconstructed channel primary feature vector corresponding to one UE and a precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE, where the second formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100011
    其中,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100012
    表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示秩rank=1的PMI为i的预编码码字,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100013
    表示一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量,w1表示rank=1的PMI码本。
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100011
    among them,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100012
    Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword of rank rank=1 with a PMI of i,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100013
    Represents a reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to one UE, and w 1 represents a PMI codebook with rank=1.
  7. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述第一导频加权矩阵 为所述单位加权矩阵和所述预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,所述根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein said first pilot weighting matrix Determining, according to at least one of the unit weighting matrix and the preset pilot weighting matrix, the second pilot weighting according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs Before the matrix, the method further includes:
    若所述M为2,所述网络设备根据两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量确定目标权值矩阵;If the M is 2, the network device determines a target weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the two UEs respectively;
    当所述两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量的相关性小于第一预设阈值时,所述网络设备根据所述两个UE对应的预编码码字和所述目标权值矩阵确定备选导频加权矩阵集。And determining, by the network device, the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix, when the correlation between the reconstructed channel main feature vectors corresponding to the two UEs is less than a first preset threshold. A set of alternative pilot weighting matrices.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备根据两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量确定目标权值矩阵包括:The method according to claim 7, wherein the determining, by the network device, the target weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the two UEs comprises:
    所述网络设备根据两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量利用第三公式确定所述目标权值矩阵,其中,所述第三公式表示为:The network device determines the target weight matrix by using a third formula according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the two UEs, where the third formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100014
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100014
    ,其中,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100015
    表示目标权值矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100016
    表示u1对应的重构信道主特征向量,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100017
    表示u2对应的重构信道主特征向量,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100018
    表示u1对应的权值向量,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100019
    表示u2对应的权值向量,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100020
    表示
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100021
    的共轭转置矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100022
    表示
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100023
    的共轭转置矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100024
    表示对角阵。
    ,among them,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100015
    Represents the target weight matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100016
    Representing the reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to u 1 ,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100017
    Representing the reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to u 2 ,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100018
    Represents the weight vector corresponding to u 1 ,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100019
    Represents the weight vector corresponding to u 2 ,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100020
    Express
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100021
    Conjugate transposed matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100022
    Express
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100023
    Conjugate transposed matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100024
    Represents a diagonal array.
  9. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备根据所述两个UE对应的预编码码字和所述目标权值矩阵确定备选导频加权矩阵集包括:The method according to claim 7, wherein the determining, by the network device, the candidate pilot weight matrix set according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix comprises:
    所述网络设备根据所述两个UE对应的预编码码字和所述目标权值矩阵利用第四公式确定备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,所述第四公式表示为:The network device determines, according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix, a candidate pilot weighting matrix set by using a fourth formula, where the fourth formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100025
    其中,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100026
    表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示rank=2的PMI为i的预编码码字,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100027
    表示目标权 值矩阵。
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100025
    among them,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100026
    Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword of rank=2 with a PMI of i,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100027
    Represents the target weight matrix.
  10. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述单位加权矩阵和所述预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,所述根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of the unit weight matrix and the preset pilot weight matrix, the M according to the M Before the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the scheduled UEs determines the second pilot weight matrix, the method further includes:
    若所述M大于或等于2,所述网络设备根据至少两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量确定目标权值矩阵;If the M is greater than or equal to 2, the network device determines a target weight matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the at least two UEs respectively;
    当任意两个UE对应的目标权值矩阵的相关性小于第二预设阈值时,所述网络设备根据所述至少两个UE对应的预编码码字和所述目标权值矩阵确定备选导频加权矩阵集。When the correlation between the target weight matrix corresponding to the two UEs is less than the second preset threshold, the network device determines the candidate guide according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix. Frequency weighting matrix set.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备根据所述至少两个UE对应的预编码码字和所述目标权值矩阵确定备选导频加权矩阵集合包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein the determining, by the network device, the candidate pilot weight matrix set according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix comprises:
    所述网络设备根据所述至少两个UE对应的预编码码字和所述目标权值矩阵利用第五公式确定备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,所述第五公式表示为:The network device determines, according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix, a candidate pilot weighting matrix set by using a fifth formula, where the fifth formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100028
    其中,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100029
    表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示rank≥2的PMI为i的预编码码字,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100030
    表示目标权值矩阵。
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100028
    among them,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100029
    Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword with a rank ≥ 2 and a PMI of i,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100030
    Represents the target weight matrix.
  12. 根据权利要求5至11任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述单位加权矩阵和所述预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,所述根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵包括:The method according to any one of claims 5 to 11, wherein if the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of the unit weight matrix and the preset pilot weight matrix, Determining, according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, the second pilot weight matrix comprises:
    所述网络设备随机选取目标预编码码字,并根据所述目标预编码矩阵从所述备选导频加权矩阵集中选取所述目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵;The network device randomly selects a target precoding codeword, and selects an alternative pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set according to the target precoding matrix;
    所述网络设备将所述目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵确定为所述第二导频加权矩阵。The network device determines an alternative pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  13. 根据权利要求5至11任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述单位加权矩阵,所述根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵包括: The method according to any one of claims 5 to 11, wherein if the first pilot weight matrix is the unit weight matrix, the UE according to each of the M scheduled UEs The reconstructed channel main feature vector determines the second pilot weight matrix including:
    所述网络设备按照预设规则确定目标预编码码字,并根据所述目标预编码矩阵从所述备选导频加权矩阵集中选取所述目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵;Determining, by the network device, a target precoding codeword according to a preset rule, and selecting, from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set, an candidate pilot weight matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword according to the target precoding matrix;
    所述网络设备将所述目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵确定为所述第二导频加权矩阵。The network device determines an alternative pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备按照预设规则确定目标预编码码字包括:The method according to claim 13, wherein the determining, by the network device, the target precoding codeword according to the preset rule comprises:
    所述网络设备利用第六公式确定所述目标预编码码字,其中,所述第六公式表示为:The network device determines the target precoding codeword by using a sixth formula, wherein the sixth formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100031
    其中,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100032
    表示目标预编码码字,n表示测量子帧sm之前的测量子帧的序号,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100033
    表示测量子帧为sm对应的备选导频加权矩阵。
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100031
    among them,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100032
    Indicates the target precoding codeword, and n denotes the sequence number of the measurement subframe before the measurement subframe s m ,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100033
    Indicates that the measurement subframe is an alternate pilot weight matrix corresponding to s m .
  15. 根据权利要求2至11任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述预设的导频加权矩阵,所述根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵包括:The method according to any one of claims 2 to 11, wherein if the first pilot weight matrix is the preset pilot weight matrix, the according to the M scheduled UEs Determining the second pilot weighting matrix by the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each UE includes:
    若所述M为1,所述网络设备获取一个UE的目标权值矩阵;If the M is 1, the network device acquires a target weight matrix of a UE;
    所述网络设备根据所述第一导频加权矩阵和所述一个UE的目标权值矩阵确定所述第二导频加权矩阵。The network device determines the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix of the one UE.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备根据所述第一导频加权矩阵和所述一个UE的目标权值矩阵确定所述第二导频加权矩阵包括:The method according to claim 15, wherein the determining, by the network device, the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix of the one UE comprises:
    所述网络设备判断所述第一导频加权矩阵和所述目标权值矩阵是否满足第七公式,其中,所述第七公式表示为:Determining, by the network device, whether the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix satisfy a seventh formula, wherein the seventh formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100034
    其中,Wi表示rank=1的PMI为i的预编码码字,w1表示rank=1的PMI码本,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100035
    表示
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100036
    的共轭转置矩阵, Q mod(m,L)表示L个测量子帧中的测量子帧序号为m的第一导频加权矩阵,δ表示约束门限值;
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100034
    Wherein, W i represents a precoding codeword with a P=1 of rank=1, and w 1 represents a PMI codebook of rank=1,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100035
    Express
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100036
    a conjugate transposed matrix, Q mod(m, L) represents a first pilot weighting matrix in which the measurement subframe number of the L measurement subframes is m, and δ represents a constraint threshold value;
    所述网络设备将满足所述第七公式的第一导频加权矩阵确定为所述第二导频加权矩阵。The network device determines a first pilot weighting matrix that satisfies the seventh formula as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备根据所述第一导频加权矩阵和所述目标权值矩阵确定所述第二导频加权矩阵之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 16, wherein after the network device determines the second pilot weight matrix according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix, the method further includes:
    所述网络设备利用第八公式确定目标预编码码字,其中,所述第八公式表示为:The network device determines a target precoding codeword by using an eighth formula, wherein the eighth formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100037
    其中,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100038
    表示目标预编码码字。
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100037
    among them,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100038
    Represents the target precoding codeword.
  18. 根据权利要求11至17任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11 to 17, wherein after determining the second pilot weighting matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, The method further includes:
    所述网络设备将第一加权数据信号发送至所述N个UE,其中,所述第一加权数据信号是由所述网络设备根据所述目标预编码码字和所述第二导频加权矩阵对第一数据信号加权得到的。Transmitting, by the network device, a first weighted data signal to the N UEs, wherein the first weighted data signal is determined by the network device according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weighting matrix Weighted from the first data signal.
  19. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,所述网络设备为多输入多输出系统中的设备,所述网络设备包括:A network device, wherein the network device is a device in a multiple input multiple output system, and the network device includes:
    接收模块,用于接收N个预编码矩阵指示PMI,其中,N为大于1的整数,所述N个PMI是N个用户设备UE根据所述网络设备发送的第一加权导频信号所确定的,所述第一加权导频信号是由所述网络设备根据第一导频加权矩阵对第一导频信号加权得到的;a receiving module, configured to receive N precoding matrix indication PMIs, where N is an integer greater than 1, and the N PMIs are determined by the N user equipment UEs according to the first weighted pilot signals sent by the network device The first weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first pilot signal according to the first pilot weight matrix;
    第一确定模块,用于根据所述接收模块接收的所述N个PMI和所述第一导频加权矩阵确定N个重构信道主特征向量;a first determining module, configured to determine N reconstructed channel main feature vectors according to the N PMIs and the first pilot weight matrix received by the receiving module;
    第二确定模块,用于从所述N个UE中确定M个被调度的UE;a second determining module, configured to determine M scheduled UEs from the N UEs;
    第三确定模块,用于根据所述第二确定模块确定的所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵,其中,M为不大于N的整数;a third determining module, configured to determine a second pilot weighting matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs determined by the second determining module, where M is not greater than An integer of N;
    发送模块,用于将所述第三确定模块确定的所述第二加权导频信号发送至 所述N个UE,其中,所述第二加权导频信号是由所述网络设备根据所述第二导频加权矩阵对第二导频信号加权得到的。a sending module, configured to send the second weighted pilot signal determined by the third determining module to The N UEs, wherein the second weighted pilot signal is obtained by the network device weighting the second pilot signal according to the second pilot weight matrix.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的网络设备,其特征在于,包括:The network device according to claim 19, comprising:
    所述第一导频加权矩阵为单位加权矩阵、预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个。The first pilot weight matrix is at least one of a unit weight matrix and a preset pilot weight matrix.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述第一确定模块具体用于根据所述N个PMI确定所述N个PMI对应的N个预编码码字;确定所述N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及所述第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵;根据所述N个预编码码字,所述第一导频加权矩阵,所述N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及所述第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵确定所述N个重构信道主特征向量。The network device according to claim 20, wherein the first determining module is specifically configured to determine N precoding codewords corresponding to the N PMIs according to the N PMIs; and determine the N pre- a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the encoded codeword and a conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix; the first pilot weighting matrix, the N according to the N precoding codewords The conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the precoding codeword and the conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix determine the N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述第一确定模块具体用于根据所述N个预编码码字,所述第一导频加权矩阵,所述N个预编码码字对应的共轭转置矩阵以及所述第一导频加权矩阵对应的共轭转置矩阵利用第一公式确定所述N个重构信道主特征向量,其中,所述第一公式表示为:The network device according to claim 21, wherein the first determining module is specifically configured to: according to the N precoding codewords, the first pilot weight matrix, the N precoding codewords Corresponding conjugate transposed matrix and conjugate transposed matrix corresponding to the first pilot weight matrix determine the N reconstructed channel main eigenvectors by using a first formula, wherein the first formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100039
    其中,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100040
    表示子帧t上确定的用户设备u的重构信道主特征向量,PrimEigVec表示求取矩阵的主特征向量,L表示预设长度内测量子帧的总个数,m是测量子帧序号,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100041
    表示测量子帧为sm的第一导频加权矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100042
    表示用户设备u对测量子帧sm的第一导频信号作信道估计后选择的PMI,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100043
    表示PMI为
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100044
    对应的预编码码字,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100045
    表示
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100046
    对应的共轭转置矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100047
    表示
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100048
    对应的共轭转置矩阵。
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100039
    among them,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100040
    Representing the reconstructed channel main feature vector of the user equipment u determined on the subframe t, PrimEigVec represents the main feature vector of the matrix, L represents the total number of measurement subframes within the preset length, and m is the measurement subframe number.
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100041
    Representing a first pilot weighting matrix in which the measurement subframe is s m ,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100042
    Determining a PMI selected by the user equipment u after channel estimation of the first pilot signal of the measurement subframe s m ,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100043
    Indicates that the PMI is
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100044
    Corresponding precoding words,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100045
    Express
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100046
    Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100047
    Express
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100048
    Corresponding conjugate transpose matrix.
  23. 根据权利要求20所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述网络设备还包括:The network device according to claim 20, wherein the network device further comprises:
    第四确定模块,用于若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述单位加权矩阵,在所述第三确定模块根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,若所述M为1,根据一个UE对应的重构信 道主特征向量和所述一个UE对应的预编码码字确定备选导频加权矩阵集。a fourth determining module, configured to: if the first pilot weight matrix is the unit weight matrix, in the third determining module, according to a reconstructed channel main feature of each of the M scheduled UEs Before the vector determines the second pilot weighting matrix, if the M is 1, according to a reconstructed signal corresponding to one UE The track master feature vector and the precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE determine an alternative pilot weighting matrix set.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述第四确定模块具体用于根据一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量和所述一个UE对应的预编码码字利用第二公式确定备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,所述第二公式表示为:The network device according to claim 23, wherein the fourth determining module is specifically configured to determine, according to a reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to one UE and a precoding codeword corresponding to the one UE, by using a second formula An alternative pilot weighting matrix set, wherein the second formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100049
    其中,Wi∈w1
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100050
    表示备选导频加权矩集,Wi表示秩rank=1的PMI为i的预编码码字,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100051
    表示一个UE对应的重构信道主特征向量,w1表示rank=1的PMI码本。
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100049
    Among them, W i ∈w 1 ,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100050
    Representing an alternative pilot weighted moment set, W i representing a pre-coded codeword of rank rank=1 with a PMI of i,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100051
    Represents a reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to one UE, and w 1 represents a PMI codebook with rank=1.
  25. 根据权利要求20所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述网络设备还包括:The network device according to claim 20, wherein the network device further comprises:
    第四确定模块,用于若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述单位加权矩阵和所述预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,在所述第三确定模块根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,若所述M为2,根据两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量确定目标权值矩阵;当所述两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量的相关性小于第一预设阈值时,根据所述两个UE对应的预编码码字和所述目标权值矩阵确定备选导频加权矩阵集。a fourth determining module, configured to: when the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of the unit weight matrix and the preset pilot weight matrix, in the third determining module according to the M Before the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the scheduled UEs determines the second pilot weight matrix, if the M is 2, the target weight matrix is determined according to the reconstructed channel main feature vectors respectively corresponding to the two UEs; Determining the candidate pilot according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix when the correlation between the reconstructed channel main feature vectors corresponding to the two UEs is less than a first preset threshold A set of weighting matrices.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述第四确定模块具体用于根据两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量利用第三公式确定所述目标权值矩阵,其中,所述第三公式表示为:The network device according to claim 25, wherein the fourth determining module is configured to determine the target weight matrix by using a third formula according to a reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to each of the two UEs, where The third formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100052
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100052
    ,其中,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100053
    表示目标权值矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100054
    表示u1对应的重构信道主特征向量,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100055
    表示u2对应的重构信道主特征向量,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100056
    表示u1对应的权值向量,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100057
    表示u2对应的权值向量,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100058
    表示
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100059
    的共轭转置矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100060
    表示
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100061
    的共轭转置矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100062
    表示对角阵。
    ,among them,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100053
    Represents the target weight matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100054
    Representing the reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to u 1 ,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100055
    Representing the reconstructed channel main eigenvector corresponding to u 2 ,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100056
    Represents the weight vector corresponding to u 1 ,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100057
    Represents the weight vector corresponding to u 2 ,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100058
    Express
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100059
    Conjugate transposed matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100060
    Express
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100061
    Conjugate transposed matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100062
    Represents a diagonal array.
  27. 根据权利要求25所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述第四确定模块具体用于根据所述两个UE对应的预编码码字和所述目标权值矩阵利用第四公式确定备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,所述第四公式表示为:The network device according to claim 25, wherein the fourth determining module is configured to determine, according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the two UEs and the target weight matrix, a fourth formula to determine an alternative guide a set of frequency weighting matrices, wherein the fourth formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100063
    其中,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100064
    表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示rank=2的PMI为i的预编码码字,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100065
    表示目标权值矩阵。
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100063
    among them,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100064
    Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword of rank=2 with a PMI of i,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100065
    Represents the target weight matrix.
  28. 根据权利要求20所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述网络设备还包括:The network device according to claim 20, wherein the network device further comprises:
    第四确定模块,用于若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述单位加权矩阵和所述预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,在所述第三确定模块根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之前,若所述M大于或等于2,根据至少两个UE分别对应的重构信道主特征向量确定目标权值矩阵;当任意两个UE对应的目标权值矩阵的相关性小于第二预设阈值时,根据所述至少两个UE对应的预编码码字和所述目标权值矩阵确定备选导频加权矩阵集。a fourth determining module, configured to: when the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of the unit weight matrix and the preset pilot weight matrix, in the third determining module according to the M Before the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the scheduled UEs determines the second pilot weighting matrix, if the M is greater than or equal to 2, the target weight is determined according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector corresponding to the at least two UEs respectively a value matrix; when the correlation of the target weight matrix corresponding to any two UEs is less than a second preset threshold, determining the candidate pilot according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix A set of weighting matrices.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述第四确定模块具体用于根据所述至少两个UE对应的预编码码字和所述目标权值矩阵利用第五公式确定备选导频加权矩阵集,其中,所述第五公式表示为:The network device according to claim 28, wherein the fourth determining module is configured to determine an candidate by using a fifth formula according to the precoding codeword corresponding to the at least two UEs and the target weight matrix a set of pilot weighting matrices, wherein the fifth formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100066
    其中,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100067
    表示备选导频加权矩阵集,Wi表示rank≥2的PMI为i的预编码码字,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100068
    表示目标权值矩阵。
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100066
    among them,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100067
    Representing a set of candidate pilot weighting matrices, W i representing a precoding codeword with a rank ≥ 2 and a PMI of i,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100068
    Represents the target weight matrix.
  30. 根据权利要求23至29任一项所述的网络设备,其特征在于,若当所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述单位加权矩阵和所述预设的导频加权矩阵中的至少一个,所述第三确定模块具体用于随机选取目标预编码码字,并根据所述目标预编码矩阵从所述备选导频加权矩阵集中选取所述目标预编码码字对应的 备选导频加权矩阵;将所述目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵确定为所述第二导频加权矩阵。The network device according to any one of claims 23 to 29, wherein, when the first pilot weight matrix is at least one of the unit weight matrix and the preset pilot weight matrix, The third determining module is specifically configured to randomly select a target precoding codeword, and select, according to the target precoding matrix, the target precoding codeword corresponding to the target pilot precoding matrix An alternative pilot weighting matrix; determining an alternative pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  31. 根据权利要求23至29任一项所述的网络设备,其特征在于,若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述单位加权矩阵,所述第三确定模块具体用于按照预设规则确定目标预编码码字,并根据所述目标预编码矩阵从所述备选导频加权矩阵集中选取所述目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵;将所述目标预编码码字对应的备选导频加权矩阵确定为所述第二导频加权矩阵。The network device according to any one of claims 23 to 29, wherein, if the first pilot weight matrix is the unit weight matrix, the third determining module is specifically configured to determine a target according to a preset rule. Precoding a codeword, and selecting, from the candidate pilot weighting matrix set, an alternative pilot weighting matrix corresponding to the target precoding codeword according to the target precoding matrix; and corresponding to the target precoding codeword An alternative pilot weighting matrix is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述第三确定模块具体用于利用第六公式确定所述目标预编码码字,其中,所述第六公式表示为:The network device according to claim 31, wherein the third determining module is specifically configured to determine the target pre-coded codeword by using a sixth formula, wherein the sixth formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100069
    其中,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100070
    表示目标预编码码字,n表示测量子帧sm之前的测量子帧的序号,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100071
    表示测量子帧为sm对应的备选导频加权矩阵。
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100069
    among them,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100070
    Indicates the target precoding codeword, and n denotes the sequence number of the measurement subframe before the measurement subframe s m ,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100071
    Indicates that the measurement subframe is an alternate pilot weight matrix corresponding to s m .
  33. 根据权利要求20至29任一项所述的网络设备,其特征在于,若所述第一导频加权矩阵为所述预设的导频加权矩阵,所述第三确定模块具体用于若所述M为1,获取一个UE的目标权值矩阵;根据所述第一导频加权矩阵和所述一个UE的目标权值矩阵确定所述第二导频加权矩阵。The network device according to any one of claims 20 to 29, wherein if the first pilot weight matrix is the preset pilot weight matrix, the third determining module is specifically used for The M is 1 and obtains a target weight matrix of one UE; and the second pilot weight matrix is determined according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix of the one UE.
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述第三确定模块具体用于判断所述第一导频加权矩阵和所述目标权值矩阵是否满足第七公式,其中,所述第七公式表示为:The network device according to claim 33, wherein the third determining module is specifically configured to determine whether the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix satisfy a seventh formula, wherein the The seven formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100072
    其中,Wi表示rank=1的PMI为i的预编码码字,w1表示rank=1的PMI码本,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100073
    表示
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100074
    的共轭转置矩阵,Q mod(m,L)表示L个测量子帧中的测量子帧序号为m的第一导频加权矩阵,δ表示约束门限值;将满足所述第七公式的第一导频加权矩阵确定为所述第二导频加权矩阵。
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100072
    Wherein, W i represents a precoding codeword with a P=1 of rank=1, and w 1 represents a PMI codebook of rank=1,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100073
    Express
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100074
    a conjugate transposed matrix, Q mod(m, L) represents a first pilot weighting matrix with measurement subframe number m in L measurement subframes, δ represents a constraint threshold; the seventh formula will be satisfied The first pilot weighting matrix is determined as the second pilot weighting matrix.
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的网络设备,其特征在于,所述第四确定模块,还用于在所述第三确定模块根据所述第一导频加权矩阵和所述目标权值矩阵 确定所述第二导频加权矩阵之后,利用第八公式确定目标预编码码字,其中,所述第八公式表示为:The network device according to claim 34, wherein the fourth determining module is further configured to: in the third determining module, according to the first pilot weight matrix and the target weight matrix After determining the second pilot weighting matrix, the target precoding codeword is determined by using an eighth formula, wherein the eighth formula is expressed as:
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100075
    其中,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100076
    表示目标预编码码字。
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100075
    among them,
    Figure PCTCN2016095970-appb-100076
    Represents the target precoding codeword.
  36. 根据权利要求29至35任一项所述的网络设备,其特征在于,A network device according to any one of claims 29 to 35, characterized in that
    所述发送模块,还用于在所述第三确定模块根据所述M个被调度的UE中的每一个UE的重构信道主特征向量确定第二导频加权矩阵之后,将第一加权数据信号发送至所述N个UE,其中,所述第一加权数据信号是由所述网络设备根据所述目标预编码码字和所述第二导频加权矩阵对第一数据信号加权得到的。 The sending module is further configured to: after the third determining module determines the second pilot weighting matrix according to the reconstructed channel main feature vector of each of the M scheduled UEs, the first weighting data Sending a signal to the N UEs, wherein the first weighted data signal is obtained by the network device weighting the first data signal according to the target precoding codeword and the second pilot weighting matrix.
PCT/CN2016/095970 2016-08-19 2016-08-19 Downlink transmission method and network device WO2018032492A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2016/095970 WO2018032492A1 (en) 2016-08-19 2016-08-19 Downlink transmission method and network device
CN201680086187.9A CN109196789A (en) 2016-08-19 2016-08-19 A kind of downlink transmission method and the network equipment

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2016/095970 WO2018032492A1 (en) 2016-08-19 2016-08-19 Downlink transmission method and network device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018032492A1 true WO2018032492A1 (en) 2018-02-22

Family

ID=61197242

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2016/095970 WO2018032492A1 (en) 2016-08-19 2016-08-19 Downlink transmission method and network device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN109196789A (en)
WO (1) WO2018032492A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023130397A1 (en) * 2022-01-07 2023-07-13 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Precoding method/apparatus/device and storage medium
WO2023185434A1 (en) * 2022-03-31 2023-10-05 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method and apparatus

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114598365B (en) * 2020-12-01 2023-10-17 维沃移动通信有限公司 Transmission method, apparatus, device, and readable storage medium

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102710388A (en) * 2011-03-28 2012-10-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Distributed preprocessing method and system for multi-base-station multi-use downlink transmission
WO2013029274A1 (en) * 2011-09-02 2013-03-07 富士通株式会社 Multi-user precoding method and device
US20130182787A1 (en) * 2010-08-16 2013-07-18 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Communication control method, base station apparatus and mobile station apparatus
WO2014205637A1 (en) * 2013-06-25 2014-12-31 华为技术有限公司 Method, device and system for weighting mimo transmission signal

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8929473B2 (en) * 2011-07-28 2015-01-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Combining baseband processing and radio frequency beam steering in wireless communication systems
CN102413487B (en) * 2011-11-24 2014-08-06 西安交通大学 Performance evaluation system aiming at Relay technology in LTE-A (Long Term Evolution-Advanced) system

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20130182787A1 (en) * 2010-08-16 2013-07-18 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Communication control method, base station apparatus and mobile station apparatus
CN102710388A (en) * 2011-03-28 2012-10-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Distributed preprocessing method and system for multi-base-station multi-use downlink transmission
WO2013029274A1 (en) * 2011-09-02 2013-03-07 富士通株式会社 Multi-user precoding method and device
WO2014205637A1 (en) * 2013-06-25 2014-12-31 华为技术有限公司 Method, device and system for weighting mimo transmission signal

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023130397A1 (en) * 2022-01-07 2023-07-13 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Precoding method/apparatus/device and storage medium
WO2023185434A1 (en) * 2022-03-31 2023-10-05 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method and apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN109196789A (en) 2019-01-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9843367B2 (en) Enhanced node B and method for precoding with reduced quantization error
EP3272022B1 (en) Methods and devices for determining precoder parameters in a wireless communication network
CN108631847B (en) Method for transmitting channel state information, terminal equipment and network equipment
CN110100393B (en) Codebook-based channel state information feedback method and device
US20190326974A1 (en) Communication Method, Base Station, And Terminal Device
CN112054825B (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
CN109951220B (en) Precoding matrix indication feedback method and device
CN111342873B (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
CN112751592B (en) Method and communication device for reporting channel state information
CN111865377B (en) Method for indicating and determining precoding matrix and communication device
WO2017124827A1 (en) Multiple-antenna data transmission method, network device, terminal device, and system
WO2017206527A1 (en) Beam-forming method, signal transmitter and signal receiver
CN111342913A (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
EP2557719B1 (en) Method and system for providing correlation matrix feedback for systems having antenna arrays
EP2945306B1 (en) Precoding matrix indication feedback method, and receiving end and transmitting end
WO2020143580A1 (en) Vector indication method for constructing precoding vector, and communication apparatus
EP3907918A1 (en) Parameter configuration method and communication apparatus
WO2018032492A1 (en) Downlink transmission method and network device
WO2015054879A1 (en) Channel state information measurement and feedback method, terminal, and base station
CN106452544B (en) Wireless communication method, base station and terminal
CN115053465A (en) Information transmission method and device
WO2020221117A1 (en) Coefficient indication method for constructing precoding matrix, and communication apparatus
WO2020244496A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2017000258A1 (en) Method and apparatus for acquiring channel state information
EP4106246A1 (en) Channel state information feedback method and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 16913249

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 16913249

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1